Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Moller Theoryofrelativity
Moller Theoryofrelativity
Moller Theoryofrelativity
CQ
OU
166116
73
AMERICAN STATE
GOVERNMENT
By
W.
BROOKE GRAVES
wrTHIRD EDITION
D. G.
Boston
THE THEORY OF
RELATIVITY
BY
C.
M0LLER
OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
PREFACE
THE
present
monograph
is
last
modern
*^
?*
f^
Apart from
tions.
The presentation of the subject in the present volume differs somewhat from the usual one in that the four-dimensional formulation of
the theory plays a less dominant role than in most of the current textCertainly the four-dimensional representation, which is based
on the symmetry between the space and time variables revealed by the
books.
has been of the utmost importance for the rapid development, particularly of the general theory of relativity. In the early books on relativity
it
this
PREFACE
vi
three chapters we have, therefore, avoided any reference to the four-dimensional picture, and the kinematics and point
mechanics of the special theory of relativity are fully developed by means
In the
first
But
in the following
and 111 of a
The motion of the
1
10
way we
leads to a reintroduction of
makes
it
I believe,
Chapter
needed to learn the methods of the general tensor calculus are out of
proportion to the use they can make of this formalism in their future
work. Such readers will find the main results of the special theory of
relativity in the first thirty -eight sections. They will also be able to
read Chapter VIII and in this way obtain an insight into the ideas
underlying Einstein's general theory of relativity without spending any
time on the laborious task of learning its special mathematical methods.
We have included only those developments of the theory of relativity
which can be regarded as safely established, the various attempts at
PREFACE
vii
by Tolman
in this series of
monographs. Within
my
to express
interest in my
work during
operation.
am
indebted to Dr.
S.
COPENHAGEN
November 1951
M.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
I.
....
2.
3.
4.
The
The
9.
7.
10.
10
_
.15
....
17
20
all effects
The aberration
of light
principle of relativity
order. Format's principle
... ...
...
of the
first
Michelson's experiment
13.
The contraction hypothesis
%8
.
CHAPTER
II.
all
RELATIVTSTIC KINEMATICS
Simultaneity of events
16.
18.
19.
20.
clocks.
The
28
29
41
44
clock paradox
'
48
51
25
26
36
25.
22
.31
.31
.33
21.
24.
phenomena
22.
23.
physical
15.
17.
12.
14.
.4
.6
as regards
ll.
...
8.
6.
5.
53
.56
.58
.62
.67
.67
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
CHAPTER
....
.
70
.
71
.74
.77
CONTENTS
31.
Inelastic collisions.
ix
particles
34.
82
85
OF THE
dimensional representation
36.
37.
Four-velocity and
velocity
acceleration.
Wave-number
...
vector.
92
92
.96
35.
97
99
Four-ray
101
/
x
39.
's 40.
mechanics
Tensors of rank 2
Angular
form
representation
'41, Tensors
42.
Pseudo-tensors
.104
.108
of force in four-dimensional
.
...
of arbitrary rank
43.
.110
.111
.112
.113
.114
44.
45.
46.
47.
without rotation
Lorentz transformations
50.
51.
RAFTER V.
for incoherent
.
.117
.118
matter
.
.125
.128
.
52.
53.
54.
The
tensor
.139
........
four-potential.
Gauge transformation
55.
58.
59.
60.
57.
61.
139
vacuum.
of electrodynamics in the
130
.136
141
143
144
147
.151
.154
.157
159
.161
CONTENTS
CHAPTER VI.
.....
62.
63.
Four -momentum
system
arid angular
.
momentum
Centre of mass
65.
66.
Transformation of
67.
Perfect fluids
68.
Scalar
density
.166
170
contmua
momentum density, and energy
elastic stress,
.
in elastic
.179
fields.
General
field
theory
...
Electrostatic systems.
72.
73.
Mmkowski's
74.
The
field
Classical
....
of
equations
electrodynamics
.
m uniformly moving
in
stationary
bodies
.195
.196
Boundary
.201
.....
75.
refractive body
The laws of thermodynamics
matter
80.
Ideal
81.
Black-body radiation
monatomic gases
....
.
206
212
214
.215
216
OF RELATIVITY
*82. The
202
.211
79.
CHAPTER VIII.
in stationary
188
.188
.191
.192
conditions
78.
181
.184
71.
77.
173
DIELECTRIC,
DYNAMICS
meson
CHAPTER VII.
163
64.
.....
.....
83.
The
84.
principle of equivalence
218
220
in the
222
85.
86.
Geodesic lines
87.
88.
....
226
.228
CONTENTS
xi
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
....
gravitational field
237
240
244
245
247
95.
96.
253
97.
255
98.
94.
reference
248
250
.258
CHAPTER IX.
264
99.
Tensor algebra
102. Pseudo -tensors. Dual tensors
101.
formulae
103.
Geodesic
104.
105.
lines.
Christoffel's
.
266
270
272
.274
.276
.279
......
.
264
.269
106.
108.
284
286
CHAPTER X.
109.
Mechanics of
110.
111.
112.
1
13.
field
288
290
294
.....
.
295
114.
115.
The electromagnetic
field
equations
principle
.......
298
302
305
Format's
308
CHAPTER XI.
....
.
118.
119.
The
The
gravitational field
linear
equations
fields
310
.313
CONTENTS
xii
120.
Simple applications
of the linear
and Coriohs
fields.
forces
The
.315
metry
123.
.321
....
122.
symmetry
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
328
333
337
......
isolated system
323
325
341
342
CHAPTER XII.
131.
132.
Cosrnological models
133.
129.
130.
134.
348
353
APPENDIXES
357
....
362
371
1.
Gauss's theorem
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
371
lic ,
....
.
372
373
a> lK
t,
by a
.
374
375
376
The condition for flat space
The action principle and the Hamiltoman equations for a particle
378
in an arbitrary gravitational field
The connexion between the determinants of the space-time metric
.381
tensor and the spatial metric tensor
m
The derivatives of the function with respect to g%* and c? and some
.....
.
9.
356
2.
4.
346
346
SUBJECT INDEX
......
....
AUTHOR INDEX
.382
384
385
1.
relativity principle of
formation
mechanics are especially well suited for the illustration of the principle
we shall start by considering purely mechanical phenomena.
of relativity,
According to Newton's
when
left
when a
relative to
Therefore
for a
however, obvious that the law of inertia holds also in every other
rigid system of reference moving with uniform velocity relative to the
'absolute' system, for a free particle will also be in uniform translatory
It
is,
motion with respect to such a system. All systems of reference for which
the law of inertia is valid are called systems of inertia. They form a
When
have
in
3595.60
r>
I,
completely equivalent.
principle of relativity in mechanics states that the systems
of inertia are also completely equivalent with regard to the other laws of
Now, the
mechanics. If this
is
true
all
We
now
'
We
x'
we
of space and time, derived from our usual experience, which also form
the basis of the Newtonian formulation of the fundamental laws of
mechanics, the connexion between the coordinate vectors x and x' for
one and the same space point in the two coordinate systems JS and $'
by
where v
is
relative to
'
;
*V.
that the origins of the two systems of coordinates coincide at the time
-- 0. To the
equations (1) may be added the equation
t'
(16)
which states that the parameter describing the time is the same in all
systems of inertia. Thus, in the Newtonian description of physical
phenomena the time is an absolute quantity. The equations (1(7) and
(l/>)
and
if
I,
HISTORICAL SURVEY
and
v relative to S
now
Let us
dx' _
~~
Jx
dt~
"eft'
or
u'
where u and
(1)
and the
By
v,
(3)
two systems
(3) is
ux
When
ux
uy
v,
uy
uz
is
uz
(4)
perpendicular to the
2-axis, (4)
u'
u'
sm&'
u$in&,
where $ and &' are the angles between the a;-axis and the directions of u
and u', respectively. Further, u ~ |u u' -- |u' denote the magnitudes
of the vectors u and u'. If we now divide one of these equations by the
|,
other we obtain
tan,?'
= --
COS IT"--V,
V/U
(5)
r
l
]_2-
co8* +
?;
^
U")
-Y
(6)
Now let us assume that the material particle with the mass m is acted
on by a force F. In the absolute system of coordinates S the particle
will then obtain an acceleration given according to Newton's second law
by the equation
From
(1 a)
and
(16)
it
now
follows that
&* dt'*
^
dt
'
and
Newtonian mechanics
in
.since
quantities,
i.e.
we obtain
w'
p
r/
x'
------
a/
Thus we
forces
m/
=^
F'.
I,
(g)
(10)
Newton
is
and
which only
depend on the acceleration of the frame of reference and therefore are in
no causal relationship with the physical properties of other terrestrial
systems. It was just this difference between the uniformly moving and
the accelerated systems of reference which led Newton to the conception
fictitious forces, e g. centrifugal forces
Coriolis forces
of absolute space.
2.
The
ot the absolute
phenomena
is
alone.
Now
system of
the basic
is
all
all
since
calling one definite system of inertia, e g. the one which is at rest relative
to the fixed stars, the absolute system and expressing all laws of nature
unsatisfactory in
system. It
is,
The physical experiments from which the laws of nature are derived
usually not performed in a system of reference which
is
are
at rest relative
f With tho exception of the la\vn of gravitation which find then natural place in the
general theory of lelativity.
HISTORICAL SURVEY
I,
is
therefore rather
complicated.
inertia in
lent to
theory of light, are special electromagnetic waves, the velocity with which
light is propagated in vacua must also be independent of the state of
motion of the
light source
If Maxwell's equa-
any system
of inertia, the velocity of light must have the same constant value c in
all systems of inertia, independently of the motion of the
light source.
This
is
same
Consequently the acceptance of the relativity principle must necessarily lead to a revision of our ordinary concepts of space and time.
Before taking such a radical step one would naturally w ant to be sure
r
that
it is
W. Wober und
schaften,
No. 142.
Wis&en-
I,
3.
as a
medium which
all
penetrates through
of absolute space. In the present section we shall fully adopt this point
of view, and our first task will be to see what consequences this will have
for the course of development of optical
moving
Let
phenomena in a system
of inertia
8 be
Relative to
is
10
3 X
cm /sec. A wave of this type
have the propagation velocity c
is completely determined by the phase velocity, the frequency of the
wave, and the direction of propagation. In the first place, we shall find
1
the transformation of these three quantities by a transition to a coordinate system *S' moving relative to the ether with a constant velocity
v in the direction of the .r-axis.
For simplicity
the
.r//-plane.
let
Then
us
in
the*
ifj
.4
cos27r/<
(11)
where v is the frequency and ex is the angle between the wave normal n
and the .s-axis. /
.rcosa+j/sincx is the distance from the origin
to that wave plane which contains a point p with the coordinates (r, y)
(cf.
Fig/1).
The phase
in (11)
Let us assume that the wave crest which passes the origin
HISTORICAL SURVEY
I,
In
of
fact, v
(1/c)
seconds.
Fir;. 1.
Now let 8' be the moving system introduced above, and let us assume
that the two coordinate systems 8' and 8 coincide at the time t when the labelled \vave passes the common origin of the systems. If;/
a point in 8' with coordinates (x\ ?/), which coincides
with;? at the time
t', the number of waves passing // trom the time of arrival
at;/ of the
wave
to
the
t
lime
will
of
course
be
the
same number F as
labeljed
up
is
t
On
F^
v'\t'
~V
,i
x cos a
)-?/
sin a
c'
where the primed letters in (12) denote the same physical quantities as
the corresponding unprimed letters in (11), but now measured in the
system of coordinates S' Thtfb the phase F is an invariant.
.
4.
I,
ordinates
tion
(2),
the two
(x,y,t)
(#', ?/,
co-
by means of
(1)
we obtain
a;'
Now
cos
'+?/' sin
nA
x', y',
t',
equations
vll
c
v Sin
From
(14)
COS a
v COS
(is)
c\
QL
a'
i.e.
"
(16)
a,
(17)
(18)
c!
we
find
by means of
c~ vcosoc.
c'
The equations
tan a,
~ - ~.
and, further,
By
cosaj,
(14) that
(19)
(14), (17),
and
(19)
is
On
the other hand, if a -/ \TT, the equations (14) and (19) involve the
velocity v, so that a measurement of frequency and velocity in principle
The Doppler
effect
called
the mathematical expression of the solight waves, gives the connexion between the
is
HISTORICAL SURVEY
I,5
v as
is
(20)
where n. v
appears
is
when
However, the formula (20) cannot be used directly in such a case, since
as a rule both the observer and the source of light will have a motion
relative to the ether.
If v
is
i.e.
of light,
we have
in analogy to (20)
v-Kl--n.v/c),
where v
By
(21)
l-(n.v)/c
may
If
we
v,
(n^)_(n^^
c2
In
iirst
The Uoppler effect is observed in the spectra of the stars, the lines of
the spectrum being shifted towards violet or red according as the earth,
during its annual motion, moves nearer to or away from the observed star.
The
is
approximately
3x
10 6 cm./sec.
10
and cosmic
I,
mostly of the same order of magnitude. Con10~ 4 i.e. the terms of the second order will be
sequently,
v/c
of the order of magnitude 10~ 8 which is far beyond the precision of such
velocities are
we have
measurements.
The Doppler
effect has
terrestrial sources.
By
first
&
second-order terms were too small to be measured, and these experiments did not therefore allow a determination of the absolute velocity.
Much later, in the thirties, such experiments were repeated by I vest
with an improved experimental technique, which allowed the secondorder terms to be determined. The results obtained were not in agreement
with (23), but they agreed with a formula derived from the theory of
relativity (equation (II. 90), ('hap. II, 25). The second-order term was
found to be independent of the direction of the light emitted and dependent only on the relative velocity v r No motion relative to the ether could
.
The
velocity v of the earth. Since v enters into equation (19), which can also
be written
c'
/0/1X
(n.v),
mentioned on
(24)
p. 8.
The
well-
known measurements
of the velocity of light by Fizeau (1849) and Foucault (1865) showed, however, no influence at all of the motion of the
earth.
f J. Stark, Ann. d Phys 21, 40 (1906), J. Stark and K Siogel, ibid 21, 457 (1906),
J Stark, W. Hermann, and S. Kmoshita, ibid 21, 462 (1906).
for example, H. E Ives and G. R Stilwell, Journal of the Optical Society of
J Cf
,
I,
HISTORICAL SURVEY
How
experiments
is
11
measured in these
not the phase velocity but the so-called ray velocity. In
is
departure and the time of return of the signal is measured. The velocity
is then determined as the ratio between the length of the path traversed
is
signal in a
(3), (5),
wave surfaces
in a
waves starting
moving with the velocity v relative to the ether system S. In S' we thus
have an 'ether wind' of the velocity
v which will carry along the elewaves
in
the
same
as
sound
waves are carried by the
mentary
way
wind.
Fig. 2 gives a
we regard every
12
vector
PQ
is
The infinitesimal
thus given by
PQ =
is
I,
-vdt.
(25)
FIG
2.
obtained as the envelope of all the elementary waves, i.e. the vector QPl
is perpendicular to a 1 at the point of contact Pv and in the limit as dt ->
QP
is
also perpendicular to
or.
where c
velocity
is
nc
by
is
we have consequently
c dt
en
(26)
dt,
definition given
by
PA =
where the unit vector
c'dt
c'n' dt,
(27)
Obviously
wave normal
in S'
(2g)
and
(25) if
we note that
PB = QP =
l
while
BA
is
c dt,
on the direction
n.
BP
PQ
dt
HISTORICAL SURVEY
I,
13
The relative direction of the ray, i.e. the direction of propagation of the
light
$', is
>
PPV
and
we have
if
>
PP =
l
where
e' is
u' dt
u'e' dt,
(29)
V
FIG. 3
Now
the vector
PP
is
the
sum
of the vectors
>
>
this gives,
u'
because of
PQ
and Ql\
- ->
(25), (26),
v.
and
(29),
(31)
In the absolute system the ray velocity is identical with the phase velocity
u
u
i.e.
ue
e
c,
en,
(32)
n',
v.
(33)
Thus we obtain the same addition theorem for ray velocities as for
particle velocities- u is the geometrical sum of u' and v. If & and &'
are the angles between the direction of the velocity vector v and the
absolute and relative ray directions, respectively, a consideration of
f,
(34))
-v/c'
and
By
u' 2
{c
we
c2
get
(35)
14
I,
A comparison between (35) and (24) shows that the relative ray velocity
in general
is
different
being of the second order in v/c. Only when the direction of the ray
(and the direction of the wave normal) is equal or opposite to the direcand c+v,
tion of v, are the two velocities identical and equal to
cv
respectively.
Now it is clear that the velocity measured by Fizeau's and Foucault's
methods is the ray velocity, but, since v also enters into (35), it should be
why no
which the
path
is
measured. In
make
e i>
2v>
e/
e l; then
we obviously have
since the ray describes a closed polygon. The time needed for the light
to traverse this closed path is then, according to (35),
t
^C
^{
If this expression
is
2_ v 2 +(v
expanded
e ; )2
p_
37 \
(v e ;j'
.
we
get,
first,
first-order
this approxi-
Thus, when terms of order higher than the first are neglected, the
measured time is the same as if the earth were at rest in the ether. A
determination of the absolute velocity v would consequently require a
measurement of quantities of at least second order. Fizeau's and
Foucault's methods, however, did not allow such a high accuracy, and it
is therefore understandable even on the basis of the ether theory that
*
I,
HISTORICAL SURVEY
15
was not until many years later that Michelson was able
method which also allowed the measurement of magnitudes
of the second order and thereby gave a final proof of the validity of the
relativity.
It
to develop a
We shall,
principle of relativity.
later section
12).
The
Hitherto
at rest relative to the world ether, the phase velocity in the absolute
system S is, according to Maxwell's phenomenological electrodynamics,
is
r 1==
where
e is
|,
(38)
medium and
/t
its
magnetic
permeability The phase velocity c\ relative to a moving system of coordinates is then, in analogy to (-4), given by
^-^-(n.v).
(39)
This formula
is
valid
if
This problem was much discussed in the early days. The simplest
assumption is that (39) remains valid, i.e that the ether passes undisturbed through the moving body without being dragged along. Then
we have in ft' an ether wind with the velocity v, and we can now find
the ray velocity by means of Huyghens's principle in the same way as in
6. In equation (35) wo have simply to replace c by the phase velocity
ct
c/7i and thus get the following expression lor the ray velocity in S'
u'
--
[c\
-v*+(v.e')*}i-
(v.e').
(40)
c[
=2
(41)
t G. G Stokos, Phil
134 (1880).
Mag
(3),
1,
16
I,
A third possibility
fractive index n.
=!--,.
On
(42)
(v/w
and, instead of
velocity
where
c*
we obtain
(39),
dragged ether
is
phase
4=
c/n
is
()
4-^.
since
= f+
c*+ a (v.n)
S is moving with
the velocity
cxv
(44)
.n)/l-l),
relative to S*.
In order to find the relative ray velocity u' by means of the method
outlined in 6, we must let the system of coordinates 8* take over the
role played by S in the former considerations. Since the ether wind in S'
2
has the velocity
(v/n ), we get, in analogy to (31),
u'
= C?-^,
n*
(45)
respectively,
cf+av,
1
p^
1
J
n2
u
,*
'
| A. J. Fresnel,
and
2
{cf
(46),
-aV+a
(v.e)
}+a(v.e))
c
...
'
n'
Ann. de chim.
et
de phys. 9, 57 (1818).
<)
HISTORICAL SURVEY
I,
or,
addition theorem
v,
= - + a(v.e).
(48)
By
17
==
u >_|_ y
A comparison between the equations (43), (46), (44), and (47) shows
that the ray velocities are identical with the phase velocities if the direction of propagation of the light is the same as or opposite to the direction
of the velocity v. Without any calculation this follows immediately from
the fact that, in this case, the ether wind carries the elementary waves
in a direction parallel to the light beam. The considerations given in
this section are valid also for the case of in homogeneous bodies with a
new
the earth.
motion of
1868 by
Hoekf
who used an
is
reflected
reflected into
Even if the whole apparatus were at rest in the ether, such an arrangement would give rise to interference fringes in the telescope, since the
slope of the mirrors cannot possibly be adjusted so accurately that two
rays 1 and 2 which focus on the same point in the telescope have traversed
a path of exactly the same optical length. However, if the whole apparatus has a velocity v with respect to the ether, this will cause an extra
phase difference &F between the rays 1 and 2, which can be calculated
by means of (40), (41), or (46).
t
3595.60
et
18
is
set
up
I,
in such a
PSl and$2 S3
way
CD
On
-FIG
no dragging at
is
all
>
4.
on the degree
2 will now depend
If there
refractive
substance.
the
dragged along by
quantities
we
and
cv
c/nv
c/n-{-v'
c+v'
where we have put the refractive index of air equal to 1. The phase
difference between the rays 2 and 1 in so far as it is due to the absolute
motion of the apparatus, is then
,
AJF
= v^-tj =
2lw
(c/n)
or, if
we
cv
first in v/c,
(50)
C
is
HISTORICAL SURVEY
I,
19
Af
The
result of
able shift of the interference lines could be detected after a rotation of the
in complete
is
which
all
relativity according
the state of motion of the measuring instruments.
Since the accuracy of Hoek's experiments did not go beyond terms of
the first order, the negative result of this experiment was, however, not
a serious difficulty for the ether theory; it only showed that the equation
(40), based on the assumption that the ether is not dragged along by the
refractive body, could not be maintained. Similarly, Stokes 's hypothesis
is ruled out by the result of Hoek's experiment, for from (41) we would
getf
AF=-^
i;A/f1
(51)
On
/
yj
\c/n
v/n
c-\-v
c/n-\-v/n
\I
v]
(52)
and if we neglect terms of order higher than the first, this quantity is zero.
immediately that only Fresnel 's value (42) for the dragging
coefficient oc gives a zero value for AF in first approximation. Hoek's
experiment can therefore be regarded as an experimental verification of
It
is
also seen
moving
bodies, at least as
ment
The only
difference
is
was at
Fizeau, C.R. 33, 349 (1851) A. A. Michelson and E. W. Morley, Amer. Journ. of
Science, 31, 377 (1886); H. Fizeau, Ann. d. Phys. und Chem., Erg. 3, 457 (1853).
t
20
I,
with that when a strong water current was sent through the tubes.
shift of the fringes could be observed.
marked
make
(48)
is
is
at rest in
\s
AB
and
2,
we obtain from
phase
difference
where
water.
means the whole path through which the light ray travels in the
The shift in the position of the fringes observed by Fizeau was in
(53).
may be regarded
these formulae from the point of view of the primitive ether theory
meets with a serious difficulty when we keep in mind that the index of
HISTORICAL SURVEY
I,
21
This
lies
is,
is
not dragged at
medium
all
c/n instead of c.
According to this theory it is also clear that the coefficient n in general
depends on the position of the frequency of the incident wave relative to
in a
at rest
is
to
emitted by the vibrating electrons in such a way that the effective phase
velocity of the light in the moving body to a first approximation is given
by Fresnel's formulae (43) and (44).
Thus
H. A. Lorentz, The Theory of Electrons, Leipzig, 1916. See also L. Rosenfeld, Theory
of Electrons,
Amsterdam,
1951.
22
I,
8', it must be specified which value for the frequency and thus
n should be inserted in (44). Now Lorentz was able to show that one
must insert the value n(v'), where v is the frequency in the system 8'
moving along with the refractive body, while n is the function of the
frequency which is valid for a body at rest in the ether.
We shall not go deeper into Lorentz 's theory since all the results mentioned above will be derived later in a much simpler way from the theory
of relativity (Chapter II). Here we shall confine ourselves to the remark
8 and in
in
for
if
we
10.
relativity as regards
all effects of
of
Fermat's
principle
According to the principle of relativity the track of a light ray connecting two points which are fixed relative to the earth should be completely independent of the absolute motion of the earth. This must at
least be true approximately, otherwise it would be impossible to make
the more remarkable as the relative ray velocity u' is, to a first
approximation, essentially dependent on the absolute velocity v. Neglecting all terms of higher than the first order in (46), we get
theory
is
u'
.=-
c/n
(v.e')/n
(54)
we
where
u' is
e' is
u'e' dt,
But instead of
(25)
and
(26)
we have
HISTORICAL SURVEY
10
I,
now QPl
= c dt/n and PQ =
v dt/n 2 where n
23
is
which are lying on the same ray and on consecutive wave planes,
a and a v conjugated points. Then the construction of the light ray
obviously consists in a determination of the conjugated points on the
consecutive wave planes. Now consider two arbitrary points on a and <r 1
respectively, with the distance ds and let us form the quantity dsju'
,
',
(54),
and
connecting these points. If the two points are conjugated as
in Fig. 2, ds/u' is equal to dt, where dt is the time which the wave front
takes to travel from the position a to the position a v If the two points
line
are not conjugated as, for instance, P and E in Fig. 2, ds/u' will always
be larger than dt. For, in this case, we have dt
PR'/u' where PR' is
and
the distance from P to the point of intersection between the line
9
PR
the elementary
Now let A
the integral
n
'"
u
A
along an arbitrary curve connecting the points A and B, where u' at
any point of the curve is the relative ray velocity (54) corresponding to
ds.
with the light ray through the points A and B, because only in this case
elements ds of the curve connect conjugated points.
will all
The ray between two arbitrary fixed points A and B in the refractive
body is thus determined by the condition that the integral (55) is a minimum for the track of the ray, and since the integral is equal to the time
which the light ray needs to travel from A to J5, this theorem is identical
with Fermat's principle which is thus a consequence of Huyghens's
principle.
in (55)
we
get,
u'
c/n
first
approxi-
c2
B
d*
as a
,v
(v.e')
=I
(54),
=n
(v.e')/n
B
Hence,
by means of
Llv.
\
(57)
ds),
'
24
10
I,
we can
replace (55)
/*-/V
A
A
This expression
is,
to
to travel from
by
<
5s
first
if
is
Hoek's experiment showed that the interference phenomenon occurring in his special experimental arrangement, at least in first approximation, was independent of the absolute motion of the earth. Nor has any
influence of the absolute motion of the earth ever been detected in the
numerous later interference experiments. These facts, which are in complete agreement with the postulate of relativity, can, however, as shown
by Lorentz,*)" easily be explained on the basis of the ether theory if we
may assume
the experiments.
Let us consider an arbitrary interference experiment where all parts
of the apparatus are at rest relative to the system of reference S' which
two rays
and
the rays
and
2 take to travel
from
B are
to
(59)
8
II
II
i(v.Jd
II
x
Seeref., p. 21.
HISTORICAL SURVEY
10
I,
25
where the integrals occurring in (59) should be taken along the two paths
I and II from A to B. Since these paths have common end-points, the last
terms in the equations (59) are equal and the difference in time is simply
given by
= - =
1
n
C n
-efc- (~ds.
Thus
same as
(60)
ii
if the
The aberration
of light
As we have seen
at
any
motion of the light source and the observer. However, the direction of a
light ray depends essentially on the velocity of the light source relative
to the observer. This phenomenon, which is called aberration, was observed in 1727 by Bradley f who noticed that the stars seem to perform a
collective annual motion in the sky. This apparent motion is simply due
to the fact that the observed direction of a light ray coming from a star
light
is,
velocity between the star and the observer, and we may therefore, for
the sake of simplicity, assume that the star is at rest in the absolute
system 8.
Now we
and
passes through the point P'. The absolute direction of the ray thus
determines the direction in which the star would be observed if the earth
were at
direction of the ray is given by formula (34). Let 6 and 6' be the angles
between the direction of motion of the earth and the actual and the
t J. Bradley, Phil. Trans. 35, 637 (1728).
26
tan0'=
We
11
I,
--.
(61)
costf+u/c
now
the path of the light ray from P' to the astronomer's telescope on the earth, at any rate in first approximation, is independent of
the state of motion of the earth, the light will not suffer any further
Since
is
true even
if
its
path passes through a strongly refracting medium as, for example, when
the telescope is filled with water. Such an experiment was performed by
Airy (1871),f who showed that the magnitude of the aberration was not
(61)
has
to
now
Michelson's experiment
As we have
up
ment of terms of higher than the first order. To this approximation, however, Lorentz's electron theory, which is based on the concept of
absolute ether, was in agreement with the postulate of relativity.
an
6.
ray
is
reflected
glass
Even
if
t G. B Airy, Proc. Roy. Soc. London, A, 20, 35 (1871), 21, 121 (1873); Phil. Mag.
43, 310 (1872).
} A. A. Michelson, Amer. Journ. of Science (3), 22, 20 (1881); A. A. Michelson and
E. W. Morley, ibid. 34, 333 (1887).
HISTORICAL SURVEY
12
I,
27
Now let us assume that the apparatus is placed in such a way that the
P/Sf x is
path
and
let
the paths
Fio.
and
time
first
length
I.
By means of (35)
6.
it is
1
obtain
I
21
c-\-v
,
I
<2)
tr/cr
on the way forth and back is parallel to the vector v. In the same
which ray 2 takes to travel from P to S2 and
t
2
back and, since in this case e' is perpendicular to v along the whole path,
since e'
get
by means of
(35)
/
2
2
2/(c
v 2 )~*.
(63)
A-F.
parallel to v, the difference in phase will be
a rotation of the apparatus should therefore cause a shift of the
ference fringes
28
I,
12
Despite the fact that Michelson would have been able to detect with
certainty a shift a hundred times smaller, he could not find any effect
at
all.
Thus
The
meant a very
serious difficulty
for the ether hypothesis. Michelson himself tried to explain the absence
of the effect by assuming that the ether was carried along by the earth
during its motion round the sun. In this case there would be no ether wind
at the surface of the earth, but perhaps at high altitudes.
Michelson
being equal to
experiment
(1
(Fig.
v 2 /c 2 )*.
6)
being given by
2/(c
-V)-i
29
(65)
f Michelsori'.s results have boon confirmed later by several investigators. See, for
example, K. J. Kennedy, Ptoc. Nat. Acad. 12, 621 (1926), and K. K. Illmgworth, Phys.
Rev. 30, 092 (1927). Contrary to these results Miller obtained a small effect. See
D. C. Miller, Rev. Mod. Phys. 5, 203 (1933).
t H. A. Loreritz, Amst. Verh., Akad. v. Wet. 1, 74 (1892).
G. F. FitzGerald, see O. Lodge, London Transact. (A) 184, 727 (1893), in particular
p. 749.
I,
HISTORICAL SURVEY
13
when
it is
29
earth. Certainly
this shortening, since all bodies, thus also the measuring sticks, are
observer at rest in the ether outside the
shortened at equal rates.
An
(66),
menon underlying
physical pheno-
mena
Michelson's experiment was only the first of a long series of attempts
motion of the earth relative to the ether. These experi-
to determine the
ref., p. 21.
30
and
I,
14
phenomena, but
magnetic phenomena.
We shall not here enter into a detailed discussion of
all
and
electro-
these experi-
mation depends only on the relative velocity of the source of light relative
This
by Ives's experiment.
Next, Lorentzf investigated the problem of which hypotheses must be
(II.
90) verified
it
was necessary
in every
which
different
moving system of
inertia
are written in terms of these local time and space variables, they assume
the same form in any system of inertia. All electromagnetic phenomena
should therefore appear to be independent of the state of motion of the
frame of reference. In
this
way
it
was
for
possible to
mentioned experiments.
t See rof., p. 21.
by the
II
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
15.
Simultaneity of events
THE
fruitless
conviction
among
was valid
for all physical phenomena. This obviously changes the whole basis of
our description of nature, for, as already mentioned in 2, the concept
of an absolute ether system loses its physical meaning as soon as the
all
Einstein was the first to formulate this new standpoint and to draw the
consequences of it in his fundamental paper of 1905.f We have already
mentioned one of these consequences in 2. Since the fundamental equaMaxwell's equations must hold now in any
tions of electrodynamics
system of
system of
inertia.
This
is,
propagation of light in
10 10 cm. /sec. in every
concepts derived from our usual experience and which are expressed in
the addition theorem (I. 3). Thus the new experiences gained from
extremely accurate experiments, which are expressed in the principle
of relativity, compel us to make a revision of these kinematical concepts
which by habit had obtained an a priori validity in the minds of physicists. Now Einstein could show that a closer analysis of the concept of
velocity, i e. a discussion of the methods by which a measurement of
velocities can actually be performed, opens up the possibility of an un-
d.
d. Radioaktivitat
und
Elektronik,
32
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
to B.
II,
15
light signal
only give the real time which the light has taken to travel
from A to B if the clocks at A and B are put right. This obviously
requires that the hands of both clocks simultaneously are in the same
position. But how can we make sure that two events occurring in two
this
way
will
We
to the clock at A,
from
to
course, not quite correct since the time signal is propagated with a finite
velocity. If we wish to be quite accurate, the clock has on the arrival of
and u
clocks at
moving in a circle.
All methods for the regulation of clocks meet with the same fundamental difficulty. The concept of simultaneity between two events in
different places obviously has no exact objective meaning at all, since we
cannot give any experimental method by which this simultaneity could
be ascertained. The same is therefore true also for the concept of velocity
As stressed by Einstein, we must first define what we understand by
.
15
II,
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
33
c in all inertial
systems.
rest at the
places in / where we
In order to synchronize the clocks
all
show, for instance, that the time which a light ray takes to traverse a
closed polygon is equal to the ratio between the total length of the
when this
is put to
-f Z /c, where / is the distance from O to P measured
with standard measuring-sticks at rest in 1 In this way all the clocks in
the inertial system / are set in a definite way. Two events occurring at
the clock
i.e.
~l~
system are equivalent, so that two standard clocks which have the same
3595.60
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
34
16
II,
when placed together at will also have the same rate when they
and P.
are installed at different points
As regards condition 2, we have only to show that a light signal emitted
from an arbitrary point l9 when the clock there records t l9 will arrive at
rate
P
another arbitrary point P when the clock at this point records the time
where
is
tt+l/c,
(I)
i.e.
If the signal
the point 0,
results
its
since the light signal has actually traversed a triangular path of total
length Z x +Z-Ho ( see Fi g- 7 )
The clock at
When
t Q -\-l Ql
c.
If this signal
had been
reflected
r
it
(o+^o/ c ) seconds
therefore arrives at
later.
when the
(4)
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
16
II,
This time
we now
is
given in
(3).
From
35
(3), (4),
and
(2)
obtain
This
is
shown
is
Let us now consider another arbitrary inertial system /'. Suppose that
in this system also we place a great number of standard clocks of identical
These clocks are distributed at the differand regulated in the same way as the clocks in / by means
/.
of light signals emitted from an arbitrary point 0' in I'. All distances in
/' are now supposed to be measured with standard measuring-sticks at
rest in /'.
in /,
description.
When the distances and the time differences are measured with clocks
and measuring-sticks in /', it then follows in the same way as in / that
the velocity of light relative to /' is also constant and equal to c in all
An event occurring at a given point P' of /' at the moment
clock at this point registers the time t' is said to occur at the
relative to /'. In general this time will be different from the time
directions.
when the
time
Two
events occurring at
different points are now, of course, called simultaneous relative to /'
if they occur at the same time t in /'.
.at
/.
Thus the concept of simultaneity has lost its absolute meaning since
two events occurring simultaneously for observers in / generally will
not be simultaneous for observers in
is c
/'.
Let
and
Since
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
36
be simultaneous relative to /
from
and
is
16
II,
moment when
at the
of the line connecting A and B. A similar criterion for simultaneity is true also relative to /'. Now let the two events be simultaneous
relative to / and let us, for instance, imagine that the line connecting
centre
v relative to
/,
and
meet
light
signals from
meet
in C.
The
at the
above-mentioned
relative to 1'
moment when
the
two
Only
in the
quite sufficient in daily life and in many cases also in physics, and this
explains the deep-rooted subjective belief in the existence of an absolute
is
The
time
y, z, t}, where x
(x, y, z)
7,
the space-time
coordinates of the point P. The coordinates (x, y, z) are found by measuring the lengths of the projections of the coordinate vector x on the
Cartesian axes by means of standard measuring-sticks at rest in the
inertial
system
/,
is
is
In this
way a
definite
inertial
system
II,
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
17
37
frame of reference
s'
x
O'
FIG. 8.
system
be specified by four space-time coordinates (x' y', z t') defining a spacetime system of coordinates S' The coordinates (jc',y', z', t') are found in
,
ti
way
by means of standard measuringand standard clocks now at rest in /'. Our primary task will be to
find the connexion between the space-time coordinates of the same
event in S and $', i.e. the transformation corresponding to the Galilean
the same
as the coordinates in
sticks
transformation
(I. 1)
in non-relativistic kinematics.
is
0.
of
at the time
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
38
S'
= a' =
constant
These points
H, f 17
=a=
(5)
form a plane
will also
constant
(6)
The constants a' and a denote the distances between these planes and the #z-plane, and, since these distances
are measured by means of measuring-sticks in different states of motion,
in
the ratio
= a' fa
(7)
For,
if
we change the
z'-axes, neither
exchanged
a nor a'
roles,
signs on the
x-
that
From
Q\
(8)
a/a
I
.
2
1 and, since the
however, that /c
positive
directions of the y- and the y'-axes are the same, a and a' must have the
same sign. Hence,
K
fl
a
(7)
and
(8) it follows,
(9)
V=
given by
do)
y.
nLi
,
__
z.
In order to find the transformation equations for the two other space
we make use of the fact that a light signal in S and in
-
time coordinates
is
propagated in
all
x * +y * +z *- c *t*
equation
is
and
put
(12)
Now
s
*'
+y + 3'a_ c ya =
'2
=#
=*
+2/
/2
+z -c
+7/'
o.
(12')
2 2
J
+z -cV 2
(13)
/2
(13')
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
17
II,
For any
zero,
s'
must then
also
be zero,
and
(z',y',z',O
this is only possible
is linear,
when
to
(x,y,z,t)
2
proportional to s
is
K (v)s 2
i.e.
(14)
is
equation
(8)
1.
z, t)
where K
By
s'
s'
39
__
actually be equal to
nr;\
lc
>
S",
i.e.
x*-c*t*
= x'
-c 2
t'
(16)
and
t'
must be
linear functions of x
x and
]8,
y, 8
x'
t'
otx+8t,
(17)
(16) is satis-
t.
For the origin O' we have x' = 0. Thus we obtain from the
equation (17) for the motion of 0' relative to S
x
- _#/,
first
is v, it
follows that
at?.
(18)
--
into
x'
- j8/'/8
By means of
(18)
and
= _ 8v =
(19)
_^
ieg==a
equation (17)
(19)
= oi(xvt),
f = yx +
x'
(20)
ott.
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
40
II,
17
Since this latter equation will be satified by all possible values of the
2
2
independent variables x and t, the coefficient of the variables x t and
,
on both
xt,
respectively,
(l-v
/c )-*
(22)
^-^/C2= ^VO=5^-
and
(23)
on both sides of the equation are equal, is then identically fulfilled, which
shows that equation (19), i.e. the assumption that relative to >SY/ moves
with a velocity
From
v, is
and
(23)
we
vt
=
(24)
y
vxfc
The
(24)
x, y, z,
are
x'+vt'
They may be obtained from (24) by interchanging the primed and the
v.
unprimed variables and replacing v by
In 1 8) the quantity v was introduced as the velocity of 0' relative to S.
It follows from (24), however, that any fixed point P' in S with constant
values of coordinates x', y' z' moves with velocity v relative to S in the
direction of the #-axis. Analogously, we see from (24') that each fixed
v relative to AS" in the direction of
point P in S moves with velocity
v
therefore
denotes
The
the '-axis.
simply the relative velocity
quantity
of the two systems of inertia.
Lorentz was the first to introduce the transformation equations (24)
and (24') and, therefore, they are usually called Lorentz transformations. The derivation of these equations from the point of view of the
(
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
17
II,
41
by
(13) is invariant.
If
Galilean transformation
18.
we put
oo, (24)
(I. 2).
in the
more general
2
together with a special Lorentz transformation (24). Since s is un2
changed by spatial rotations, s is thus also invariant by these. more
Sometimes we shall need explicit expressions for the Lorentz transformations in the general case and it is convenient then to use the following vector representation. Let us, for a moment, again consider a special
Lorentz transformation corresponding to the orientation of the coordi8. We can now depict the space vectors
(x,y,z)
and
x'
(x',y',z')
where (v. x) = v x x-{-v v y-\-vz z\^ the scalar product of the image vectors
x and v. It is immediately seen that the three components of the vector
equation in (25) are identical with the first three equations
Introducing in the same manner the image vector v'
die spezielle
und
S'
(24).
',
v, 0, 0)
the inverse
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
42
equations
(24')
18
II,
~-=
(25')
Since
v'
- -v
(26)
v.
changing (x',')
of
the
Cartesian
axes
in
a
rotation
S
the
components of x and v
By
undergo an orthogonal transformation, and since the axes in the abstract
vector space are supposed to be fixed, this means that the rotation of the
(
'artesian axes in
x and
v,
Cartesian axes in
S and
S'
are subjected to the same rotations (starting from their position as shown
in Fig. 8). This means that the sets of variables (x,y,z) and (x ,y',z')
are subjected to orthogonal transformations with the same coefficients.
r
tion without rotation, since the angles (measured in $and S', respectively)
through which the Cartesian axes in S and S' should be turned in order
-l)t^
y'
(y-i)v'*aA>H-{i +
]) VzVx
(y
r
=-
yv x x/c
x/v
(y-W
l)vl/v*}z
(27)
vz yt
-\-yt
stituting
vx
~vz
Vy,
(x,y,z,t)
and
(x',y',z',t')
and sub-
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
18
II,
43
shown in Fig.
first
last
Dx'
where
is
x+v{(y-l)(x.v)/*;
-r
8.
While the
equation has
(28 o)
*}>
rotation.
Dv'
we have
~v,
(29)
(v
may
=
=
X'
*'
form
3>-ix-v'{(y-l)(x.v)/-y*}
]
/'
y{*-(V.X)/C}
axes in
The
= X>x'-v(-
=v
which
hand
also
(28') into
the right-
and
equation
If
side of (286).
(28')
)>
we put
oo,
(25)
c 2 t 2 == (x'.x')
cV 2
(30)
(I. 1).
Until
time
t'
replace
(x' 9 y',z',t
in (24), (25),
and
(28)
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
44
respectively,
where
x'Q
y'Q
z ()
are constants.
t'
II,
18
By an inhomogeneous
//!,
2^
/!
and
j\2
7/0,
As
between
-=
z2
>
^2>
A//
.^-.r,,,
//r~//2>
the constants
y'Qj z'
.rj,,
t'
(}
will
A.r 2
2
|
A?/
+ A;:
>2
A.s
2
~ r 2 A/ 2
(31)
will
e.
of physics must have the same form in every inertial system. In other
words the fundamental equations must be form-invariant or covariant
As we
matically fulfilled
(cf.
Chapter
III).
From
certain con-
systems 8 and
relative to 8'
and is
and clocks
II,
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
19
45
of the rod therefore have constant coordinates x^ and x\ and the length
(its
rest length) is
70
i
~/ ~~ ~'
^
2
*!
According to the first equation (24) the motion of the two end-points
relative to S is given by the equations
S as the differ-
From
(32)
I
we then obtain
x 2 (t)~^(t)
(xi-XiKI-vifc*)*
Z(l-t'
/c
(33)
)*,
which is independent of t. On the other hand, since the systems S and S'
are completely equivalent, a metre stick at rest on the .r-axis of S which
has the length 1 in 8 will have a length / relative to /S', which again is
given by
(33).
quite generally say that a body which moves with a velocity v relative
to an arbitrary inertial system 8 is contracted in the direction of its
V
The equation
(33)
is
--
V Q (}-v*/c^-.
(34)
Lorentz equation
(I.
66).
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
46
II,
19
as infinitely large.
In spite of the fact that the concept of simultaneity enters into the
above definition of the length of a moving rod, equation (33), as pointed
out by Einstein, can in principle be verified by experiment without the
use of clocks. Let us consider two rods
and 2 with the same rest
l
S
the velocities v and
in
with
1
the
#-axis
v,
length
moving along
on
to
a
stick
the
of
Since
(33) depends
according
length
respectively.
the square of the velocity only,
must have the same constant
l and
2
length I relative to 8, which means that they must coincide at a certain
time t. In other words, the coincidences of the two ends of l with the
events relative to S. Let these
ends of
2 must be simultaneous
the magnitude of I.
Even if it is, of course, impossible to perform such an experiment in
practice with an accuracy sufficiently high to verify equation (33), this
consideration shows that the Lorentz contraction given by (33) is a real
between measuring-sticks in motion relative to each other. In this conit is natural to ask for the cause of the contraction. According to
the principle of relativity, the answer must be that such a question is
just as delusive as if, after the discovery of the law of inertia, the question
were put why a body left to itself will continue to move straight forward
with uniform velocity. While such a question was well justified in
Aristotelian physics it must be rejected as meaningless after Galileo's
discovery. According to Galilean and Newtonian mechanics only the
deviations from uniform translatory motions require a cause.
While Lorentz attempted to explain the contraction phenomenon on
nexion
phenomenon
is
of a
character.
Instead of
considering the contraction to be a phenomenon which has to be explained on the basis of an atomistic theory of material bodies, it should
be
satisfied
by any atomistic
RFLATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
19
II,
47
respectively.
o/ovi
-v*c*)~*
'
where
is
X2
")
1})
-.2
o c? \
-,'
(35)
x
'
xx
If r
it is
r'
which can be
From
r[,+r'_L, (35)
can
r'+v^-^{(l
v 2 /c*)*
is
(35')
1},
verified
(35') it
axes in S' will thus from the point of view of an observer in S generally
not be parallel to the axes in 8. Hence if we state that the Cartesian
axes have the same orientation in a Lorentz transformation without
coordinates in
will generally
when looked upon from the system S. For this reason it was necessary to
depict the vectors x and x' in the neutral abstract vector space introduced on
p. 41.
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
48
20
II,
20.
moment
tion (24'),
ti
Somewhat
later,
other clock in
By
== f the
lt
/'
will record
'
'
when
$ which
(y
t'
t'
2,
it
we obtain
(36)
i.e.
a clock which
is
v relative to
will
be slow
When we keep in mind that the systems S and S' are equivalent it is
obvious that a clock at rest in 8 similarly will lag behind the clocks
inS'.
Since the Lorentz transformation from which this result
is
deduced
is
based upon the method of synchronizing the clocks in S and /S', discussed in
16, one could think that the retardation of moving clocks
described by (36) was only apparent. However, just as in the case of
the Lorentz contraction, it can be shown that equation (36) contains a
time
the clock
the velocity
C2
set in
is
At the time
v.
and, according to
(36), it will
p (lv
/c )*.
Immediately
which at the
return of
C2
start of
,
C2
record times
e(l uation
The
difference
between
and
and
2,
respectively, connected
(l-t^/c'K.
t
may now
(37)
in principle be
whole process.
by the
measured
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
20
II,
49
As mentioned by Einstein in
this
C2 relative to
/S,
is
system
velocity
to
moving clock itself is called the proper time r of the clock. According
the increase in proper time
(36) we have the following relation between
dr and the increase dt ol the time in S.
dr=
This equation
is
now assumed
is
the
clock where
(l-u*/c*)*
momentary
any lime
is the
the system in
It should
clocks from
and
to
moving
Hence we assume
arbitrarily
same as
which
an
on
(38)
dt.
&,
i.e.
now
it
of the clockwork. But, just as in the case of the Lorentz contraction,
an
as
elementary
is more adequate to regard the retardation phenomenon
of the principle of relativity.
which is a direct
consequence
phenomenon
ot
If we took Newtonian mechanics as a basis for the calculation
be
would
clocks
of
moving
the working of the clock, no retardation
found since the time in Newtonian fundamental equations is an invariant
the Newtonian equations
parameter (cf. I. 1 6), but this just shows that
,
3595.60
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
50
II,
20
(cf.
Chapters
of these equations.
In view of the fact that an arbitrary physical system can be used as a
clock, we see that any physical system w hich is moving relative to a
r
same system
mean
will
(1
^'
/c
(39)
We
the proper frequency of the atom, i.e. the frequency of the emitted
light measured in the system of inertia /S in which the atom is at rest,
v
is
number
the
interval
AT
(36),
v 2 /c 2 )* in the rest
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
20
II,
51
formula (I. 14). This red shift of the spectral lines, the so-called 'transverse' Doppler effect to which we shall come back later ( 25, p. 62), is
a direct consequence of the retardation of moving clocks described by
(36),
of this effect
formula
21.
(36).
Transformation
of particle velocities
Let us again consider the two systems of inertia S and S' (Fig. 8) whose
space-time coordinates are connected by (24) and (24'). The motion of
an arbitrarily moving particle will then in S be described by a set of
equations
which
may
described
is
x'
y'
x'(t'),
y(()>
(41)
by functions
= y'(t'),
z'
(41')
z'(t'),
transformations (24)
to S'
is
defined
by
,,-
,
.
(42)
are given
Idx du dz\
-
'
"
(43)
'
(?
now
y(dxvdt),
e\\
/ A
dt' dt)
by
dy'
-^
dz'
dy,
dz
\
}
y(dt-v dx/c
gives
.
4
>
v"*
*/
/ 4
-\
1lx
^x
'
,
11
M'v\ I
2-
r-
'
)
,
Uz
'M'z\
^ /^
/
.
;
(45)
(I.
4) in
the limit as
way by
c -> oo.
The
interchanging
v for
v.
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
52
II,
U COS I/
i?
and
'
Qf
UVCQS&/C
where
t*/
OXIJL
perpendicular to
is
i/
JL
t/
lUVCOSl
'
i?
21
u and
r
,
respectively.
From
we obtain
these equations
tan T?'
'
Sm
^-~- -
(I. 5)
From
(I. 6).
formula
and thus
If u,
For
_^/c
2)i
---
we
(48)
for velocities
^-~ ?;
__
calculation the
(i^ u 2/ c 2^i_ v 2f c ^}
From
we obtain by an elementary
theorem
'
rHativistic addition
"
(47)
__.^/ c 2) (l
(J
(46)
* ~~
2
~~ 2v CQS &lu
1?2 8ln2 #A'
^ v2 / u
and
directly
__
u'-\-v
c.
of inertia
y/
>S
that particles
(or,
more
>
it
c,
move with
a velocity
relative to
>
'
1
a -axis
this
event in 8
are,
Immediately after
x'
----
according to
its arrival in
iit\.
>
relative to
AS".
P on the negative
(24'),
II,
to
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
21
with a velocity
w>
53
c relative to S.
signal
is
w(t-tj+xp
of S at a time t 2 which
from
this equation
by putting x
>
u'
w^
c*/v,
1
is
obtained
0,
yf^lu'v/ct+W
t^Xpliv
If we now choose u' and w so that
/
(51)
v)/}.
(52)
--
v/c
(53)'
-l
0,
(54)
O records a number
which
is
greater than the velocity of light relative to any system of inertia. This
represents a general statement regarding the fundamental laws of
nature.
velocities larger
than
r.
By differentiation of (25) and (25') we obtain the following transformation equations for velocities in the case of Lorentz transformations
without rotation
_
l-(v.u)/c
= (l_^c 2)iuM-I-l-?;c
(1
When
(I.
w'^
)(L
u' is perpendicular to v,
u
and when u
is
parallel to
22. Successive
the limit as
3) in
2
)*
i.e.
= v + (l
v 2 /r 2 )i(l-M 2 /r, 2 )i
(1
for u'.v
2
i;
v we get back
c -> oo.
0, (55')
(56)
reduces to
/c )iu'
(57)
Lorentz transformations.
cession
Let us now consider three
velocity
incrtial
systems S,
S',
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
54
II,
22
then given by a (generally inhomogeneous) Lorentz transformation. In the same way, the connexion
between (x',f) and the coordinates (x" ,t") in S" is represented by a
Lorentz transformation.
By
is
t"
t'
-= 0,
the origins in
8 and S"
This shows that the homogeneous Lorentz transformations form a subgroup. It is also clear that the pure spatial rota-
at the time
t"
0.
tion (25), while the transition from 8' to 8" is described by the equation
obtained from (25) after replacing (x,,v) by (x',',u') and (x',') by
(x", t"). By elimination of x', t' we then obtain a Lorentz transformation
X"
- D-IX-W"(*^[
1"[
in general is different
-},
(58)
w is the velocity of the system 8" relative to S and w" is the velocity of
S
identifying u with
in this formula,
__
1
From
i.e.
we
'
+ (U'.V)/C*
w"
of
relative to S"
''
by
KELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
22
II,
replacing
v and
u'
u'
by
and
v, respectively; thus
--
__ 1
According to
(29)
we have
55
we have
'
+ (!'. V)/C
'
in our case
Dw" = ~w,
(60)
and a comparison of
in
v,
w = ~w =
i.e.
in this case
l+k
>
is
also
without rotation.
Let us now consider the case where the transition from S' to S" is an
infinitesimal transformation,
i.e.
where
u' is infinitesimal.
Neglecting
terms of higher than first order in u', the transformation from S' to
S" is reduced to
2
x"
t"
x'-uY,
(61)
J'-(u'.x')/c
all
and
for
_/v +
'-v<X'?l>'
(62)
By substituting the expressions (25) for x' and t' in (61) we obtain
an equation which after, a simple, but lengthy, calculation may be written
in the form (58) with
dv
=w
Thus, we have
Dx =
|ft|
of the vector
ft.
With
I)
and w"
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
56
now
some way
22
IT,
is
satisfied to
e.
it
-\-dt
has
relative to the axes in 8' provided that the forces on the particle
,
do not
order to give
t-}-dt in
system
to
is
constant, this
8 with
the
velocity of precession
w=
where v
r/v/rf/ is
obtain to a
first
--^K
-^
- l}(v X v),
(65)
'ewe
approximation
Thomas
first
time by Thomasf
and
is
23.
precession.
to
of the form
T
t L.
=-,
A<**
W. Thomas,
TCOS
Phil
^Pl
,,--
May
(7),
3,
J?
,
(1927).
(67)
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
23
II,
where a
is
57
x-axis.
In a
system of coordinates S' moving in the direction of the ^-axis with the
velocity v relative to S (cf. Fig. 1), the wave is described by corresponding
functions obtained from (67) when replacing the quantities occurring in
the phase by the corresponding quantities measured in the system of
From
coordinates S'.
it
must be
--
(,
_-r
-- -.^'
,/,/
cos
cx'
?/'
sin a'\
w^
\t
and at
all
(bS)
I
times.
Now
using the
~~~
v cos OL/W
~~
cos
v sin
vw/c~ ~vx'
ex
y
,
w
an equation which must be
This
isnrx
----w y
/',
.r',
//.
is
I--VCO&OL/W
sn
W
v'
cos
OL
From
these equations
sn
W
y'',
(70)
w(\
rw/c
?;
2
)
/c
)-
we obtain
.,
COS
ex
(71)
VWJC*
wvconoi
2vw cos oc
The
.*;',
<x
i/(cos
w'
(<>9)
(v.n)/w
(\
independent
variables
v 2 w*
~~
v* sin 2 a
way by interchanging
the primed and the unprimed quantities and replacing v by
v. In the
limit as c -> oo, the equations (70), (71), and (72) reduce to the nonrelativistic
formulae
(I.
and
(I.
19).
KKLATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
58
23
II,
which thus
relativistically invariant.
is
the
The ray
24.
??,
velocity in
moving bodies
any constant
r/
determine the ray velocity are spherical waves with the con-
principle,
stant velocity
J
This
is
not
w
so,
---
/r.
c/n.
rt
(73)
however, in the system of coordinates S. Let us conpropagation of an elementary wave which, at the
is emitted from the common origin 0, O' of S and 8'.
time
In
r/
>S
--
- 0,
wave
where w'
is
given by
(73).
is
0,
(74)
(24)
t L. do Brogho, Th&so,
Pans
1924.
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
II,
24
An
is
59
from a point
(:r
T/ O)
in the #?/-plane of the system S will thus, at the time J-f A, have a curve
of intersection with the o;?/-plane which is described by the equation
My; *o,yo) We
c
>
>
and
>
>6>
1, i e.
w/
<
A* 2
c.
0.
In
this case
(76)
\
FKS.
9.
-\-a A, y Q and with the semiA, respectively. The elementary waves are thus
dragged along by the medium with the velocity a, and simultaneously
is
an
ellipse
axes bw'
with
A and
its
(}
b^w'
b^.
Now
Let
cr
is
ellipse
P:
(x
sin a
~ C
elementary wave
(77)
in Fig. 9 be a
xy -plane
The
(l--?; /r )ismrx'
tana
line of intersection
constant.
with the
(78)
at the time
t.
It
is
(76).
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
60
24
II,
at the time
The
direction
is
y.
PP ^
Since P
l
A/,
(79)
equation
-
or
----
sin a
(x
,r
ex
a A/)sina
XQ
cos
(76), (78),
b(y
and
~-
we
(80)
.rcostt-f-ysinrc
)cosa.
?/
<7
\-\a-\- w'{b(b-\
(80)
obtain by elimination
in the
form
(81)
The last term in (81 gives the distance PA between the two wave planes
which must be equal to w A/, where w is the phase velocity. Therefore
we obtain
)
(82)
6, and a it is easily
inserting the expressions (75) and (77) for
is identical with the inverse of the equation (72).
According to (79) we have
By
11
X I~~ X Q
*-^Ar'
__
V \-~lh
^-~AT~
/oo\
(83)
is
(75)
equal to
--
The equations
and
(80),
we
tan raw/
and remembering
the phase velocity w' in $', we find
(77) for a, 6, a
(45),
which
KELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
24
II,
61
is
&,
with respect
(47)
twit,
we obtain
(86)
Here
and e
^'
is
(87)
c/w,
v.e
In vacuum,
i.e.
for
I,
i.e.
i'cos#.
u'
(88)
u and
r,
are consequently
equal to c, and the formulae (46) and (47) for the ray velocity become
identical with the equations (71) and (72) for the phase velocity. According to the theory of relativity the ray velocity in vacuum is thus identical
,
with the phase velocity in any inert ial system. In the absolute ether
theory this was the case only in the absolute system. This difference is
due to the fact that the elementary waves in vacuum according to the
theory of relativity are spherical waves with a fixed centre in any system
of inertia. (For w ~ c we get from (75) a
and b -- .) We shall see
r
---
is
is
e.
and
ViZ
"
= &*?.,
lv/cn
(89)'
^
where the plus or the minus signs should be taken depending on whether
the ray travels in the same direction as the medium or opposite to it.
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
62
II,
25
25.
The
relativistic
is
identifying the inertial systems 8 and 8' with the rest systems of
the observer and of the light source, respectively. The frequency v is
then the frequency measured by the observer, and v is equal to the
by
c and the
proper frequency v of the light source. Now, in vacuum, w
direction of the ray is equal to the direction of the wave normal. Thus,
we obtain
l_Cv eWr
<>
LiirJ/r
//I
/
For
(90)
\
/
2 //2\
/
where v
e
is
(v. e)
lar to the
when the direction of the observed light is perpendicudirection of motion of the light source, we get the formula for
0,
e.
mentioned
in
5,
light ray in
two inertial
we obtain
COS0 + V/C
approximation only
(cf.
10).
t See ref., p. 10.
II,
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
25
Another
63
is
that here
the aberration also appears in the direction of the phase velocity. While,
in the absolute theory, the wave normal according to (I. 28) has the same
direction in
S and in S',
tion of the
wave
the relativistic equation (71) for the transformanormal in vacuo is identical with the transformation
u
where a
u '+v.e(l
u' 2 /c 2 ) =- c/r*+o:(v.e),
(92)
thus follows directly from the principle of relativity without any hypotheses regarding the atomic structure of the medium. It should be
stressed, however, that Fresnel's theory
is
true to a
first
approximation
we
first
medium whereas
frequency v in the rest system of the medium. When we neglect all quantities of order higher than the first, the connexion between v and v,
according to
(70), is
given by
v'v
-=
-vn(v.e)lc,
(93)
the difference between the directions of the ray and of the wave normal
t P. Zeernan, Amst. Versl. 23, 245 (1914); 24, 18 (1915).
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
64
Hence,
v.
n(v)
this
n(v)
n2
dn nv(v
dv
where n
25
II,
e)
v.
By
using
(94)
medium
is
valid.
in the system
result of these
experiments
In all these experiments, only effects of first order could be measured,
since the velocities with which the mirrors and the refractive media could
be moved were so small compared with the velocity of light that the terms
of second order in equation (86) were negligible compared with the
accuracy of the measurements. In this connexion it is instructive to
consider a slightly generalized Michelson experiment in which the whole
apparatus is filled with a refractive medium. From the principle of relativity
it is
This result
is
no displacement of the
inter-
also obtained
t'
which the two rays take to traverse the paths PS^ P and P*Sf2 P in the
system of inertia 8' in which the apparatus is at rest for in this system the
velocity of light is the same, viz. c/n in all directions and therefore t[ = 2'2
Now it must be required, of course, that the same zero result is ob;
when the
effect is treated
So
is
obviously \t 2
During
this
t G. Sagnac, C.R. 157, 708, 1410 (1913), Joutn. de Phys. (5), 4, 177 (1914).
RKLATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
25
IT,
65
a distance \vt z in S, and the ray has traversed a length %ut 2 where the
is determined by (86) or (47). In Fig. 10 these distances
,
ray velocity u
are
shown
as
P and S
PP* and
PA!?*,
by
2
between the ray and the direction of v is given by
cos$ = v/u.
Substituting this in (47)
to
n2
we
obtain,
_. 9V
i/ 2
(95)
By means
$2
to the triangle
from Fig. 10
PP*8* we
obtain, moreover,
J? 2
(96)
15
(u-
V-)*
2L
>
FIG. 10.
is
(l~v
/c
(98)
)*
and 8l measured
in S.
Therefore
we have
l+v/cn
v/cn)
or
(99)
The time
simply^
by
t{
replacing v
by
?;,
i.e.
l
3595.60
n(l
v/cn)
is
obtained
RELATIVISTIC KINEMATICS
66
The
total time
II,
25
then
is
'--'f^-i^v-
<
100 >
second order.
performed, we
formula
for
PS
n
is
we would
obtain
y-
even
if
we assume
(98).
In the same
way
as the negative result of the usual Michelson experias an experimental verification of Lorentz 's
formula
higher order. The same considerations can be applied to Hoek's experiment discussed in 8.
Ill
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
Momentum and mass
of a particle
As mentioned in the conclusion of 18, it is necessary to change Newton 's
fundamental equations of mechanics in order to bring them into accordance with the principle of relativity In the domain, where all velocities
26.
to a system of inertia S,
tional to
we
shall assign a
momentum
vector p propor-
mu.
(1)
m=
m(u)=f(u).
(2)
g iven
p'=
where
is
m'u',
(3)
inertia. |
t G. N. Lewis
and R.
C.
(1909).
RKLATIVISTIC MECHANICS
68
of
it
55)
(II.
26.
collision so that
- -u r
u;
By means
III,
(6)
-u
--=
u;
(6)
2.
u l and U 2
and u[ and u'2 relative to 8'. We shall in particular consider
in which the final and initial velocities of particle 1 have
a collision
opposite directions,
i.e.
= -au
Ui
where
is
(7)
t,
have
u2
-=
--u 2
(8)
(8)^
0'8
which, according to
an observer
relative to
(II. 55),
/(%)i+/K)2
(9)
-u
2.
relation (2)
is
momentum
in
gives
=/(*i)Ui+/(w 2 )u 2
(10)
collision is perpendicular to v,
(5), (7),
and
before the
(11)
K
and
i.e.
(i^.vJ-O.
According to
and
involves
us, furthermore,
(5), (7),
=--fli,
o; =.
Let
From
in 8.
(u t .v)
---
v)
--
(12)
(u^.v) -= 0.
(13)
For the transformation of the velocities u.> and U 2 we can therefore use
the simple formula (II. 57). Thus we get
u2
and
=r
u 2 (l~r 2 /c 2 )H v
7*5
-=
(U 2 .u 2 )
--
- v-u^l-^/c
+v
/c
?/f(l
?
u.= ul-?; 2
(14)
(15)
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
26
Ill,
Introducing
be written
and
(14), (15),
we
69
(17)
is
and
(13),
u l9
uv
(1 1)
(18)
in (7).
[/(i)-/U/[f( -'
/f
ut
the coefficient of
ux
/(u,)
If \ve are to
ut
l2
)+' l}(l-
and
in (19)
J(u 1
-u 1 )
0.
o,
-y.
must be
zero,
i.e.
have conservation of
(19)
(18),
2u x
D!
/c*)
momentum
in
any
(20)
collisions of the
kind considered, the function / must satisfy the equation (20) for
values of the independent variables u and
tional equation
way we
is
In this
(2)
and
(21)
we thus obtain
m=
mass of a
___
V(i~^
/(())
mQ
(22)}
(
particle
The constant
identical
by
v.
is
all
get
values of u^ and
From
The
v.
tum
of the particle
we now
get,
according to
mo u
(1)
and
(22),
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
70
27
III,
27. Force,
When
MT
-.
fc"4
A \
(24)
momentum
As
time
in
is
of the particle.
defined by
where u
;=
(F.u),
(25)
T of
rf
j-- A
at
---(F.u),
(26)
expressing that the change of the kinetic energy per unit time
the work A.
Using
(23)
and
d
mn u
ra n
u du\
equal to
may be written
mn u
is
du
dt)
or, since
u
u*"\
7J
.
'
c*(l-~u*/c
)i
dt
du
,
dt)
A =
/I
*^
,,.2/.,2U
J*
,7/1/1
^L
~.2ls,'2\\r
(27)
I
\
u
<
C
and thus
~
m
--/7T
may
28 >
be
c2,
!!/^- m o^
(29)
If
RELATIV1STIC MECHANICS
27
Ill,
is
2
(u/c)
c,
71
in
terms of
Newtonian
T = %m Q u 2
(30)
In the same way, all quantities of relativistic mechanics and the relations
between these quantities are identical with the corresponding quantities
and relations of Newtonian mechanics in the domain where the velocities
are small compared with
between
relativistic
c.
least of
second
28.
momentum
Consider again the two systems of inertia S and 8' corresponding to the
special Lorentz transformation (II. 24). The momentum and the
kinetic energy of a particle are then given in both systems
From
by formulae
(II.
45)
=-=
T+
c*
-,-,-^^T
(1U*/C*)*
me*.
(31
The quantity E,
measure
c2
is
we speak
any
attributing
E = T
f
quantity
By means
(II.
48)
x
-\-m c
is
of (23), (31),
we then
get
u*
<J(l-u
/c
--uc
Q
(l+vux /c z
u\+v
v
"-
Q (u'r
+v)
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
72
In the same
way we
obtain
(32)
Pv PS E\#
transformed in the same way as the space- time
Ps,
are
Thus we have,
coordinates x,
and
(13') in
y, z,
t.
Chap-
/'2
*-%*=?
(23)
2
raj)C
(33)
ter II,
From
28
III,
and
(31)
Therefore
<
34 )
p*--=
c
E=
i.e.
-m\c\
2
c(ragc +j9
(35)
)i.
Since the quantities (33) also transform like the coordinates (x,y,z t)
by rotations of the Cartesian axes, the transformation equations for
9
momentum and
transformation
(II. 25'),
p-p ^
E^
' 7/c
A/tl!_,-,<.-,
J
v>Lvv
Ir7'_l_
^M
(37)
!
immediately seen that (34), which is analogous to (II. 30), is a consequence of (37).
Let us now consider a systemef n free particles. If the momentum and
*>
(l)
l) 2
energy of the ith particle are denoted by p and E = T(t) -fw c
kinetic
and
w
T^
is
the
is
where
the
rest
mass
of
energy
respectively,
It is
momentum and
by
^
rr\
2P< "'
2,
i
TO)
J-
>
ni ()
V
2,
i
<,
KKLATIVISTIC MECHANICS
28
Ill,
73
particle separately
that the same equations are valid also for the total momentum and
energy of the system. Thus we can take over the equations (32) and (37)
for a system of free particles, where p, E, and T denote the total momen-
tum and
energy, while
masses of the
w?
particles.
From
inertia.
and
j = F,
(39a)
dtt
^=
(396)
(F.u).
we can
known
_
~
Hi'
Thus, by means of
(v.u')/r
2
'
~J(i^*lc*)
(37),
^ dp dt'
dt'
dt
')[l^^
where F'
is
~~
'
the force in the system S'. In relativistic mechanics the conit has in Newtonian
we
Minkowski force
and the
^
>
dp
dr
_,
p
M
I/
(II. 38),
dE
:il
,
dr
be written
.
u.
(42)
RKLATIVISTIC MECHANICS
74
III,
28
is
(II. 56).
29.
ticle in
of motion only when it is known how the force F depends on the variables
of the physical system causing the change of momentum of the particle.
If the velocity of the particle is small relative to c, the relativistic equation must, however, be identical with Newton's second law and, in the
system 8 relative to which the particle has velocity zero at the
inertial
moment
considered,
system $, we have v
in
u and
-*
is
identical with
we can then
force
S be
u'
u,
and we
(40)
Let
if
(u
<
the Newtonian force. Decomposing the forces into two components respectively, parallel and perpendicular to u, thus putting
where
is
F
*
(43)
*
F,i4-F,
III* J_
-~
F?4-F^
-fJ. j_,
J.
||
F L = F^l-* 2 /' 2
(43')
we
know
F
If
the Newtonian force
we can thus, by means of (43) or
(43'), calculate F in any system S. In this way we can show, for example
1
F,,=--F{|,
(Chap. V,
58),
F-
E + -(uxH)
(44)
where
dp
*
dt
e is
d(mu)
'
'_
dt
du
I
tyy\
dt
dm II
dt
~~
du
1
I
<yy\
dt
dE ||
dt
du
tyY*
dt
,
I
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
29
Ill,
where
(39 a)
we
75
m du
()
(45)
From
Let us
first
F = m Q g and which
According to
of the force. Therefore the path of the particle will be a straight line and
this line as x-axis. (39 a) then reduces to
we can choose
u
If
we assume
first
integration
B
If
we
dx
is
dx
--
0, \\e
get
by a
at
, An
(46)
.
when
0,
we obtain by a second
integration
<47)
or
2
ff
As long as (gt) 2 < c 2 we can neglect powers of (gt/c) higher than the
second, and we obtain from (47) the usual equation
,
:==
T?gt
M. Born, Ann.
d.
Phys. 30,
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
76
For large
t,
i.e.
>
29
with increasing
For
III,
is
velocity of light.
An
p. 53.
electrically
in
in
21,
electric
field with a velocity parallel to the direction of the field represents a case
of the type just considered.
Let us now consider the motion of a charged particle in a constant
and perpendicular
ponents parallel
U||-f-Uj_,
to
written
F
i.e.
the force
and
(45)
is
= ^(uxH) =
c
(u
perpendicular both to u, u
xH),
L
(49)
and H. Therefore,
(F.u)
0,
in
Newtonian mechanics,
m-" = F =
at
i.e.
(Uj.xH).
(50)
Here
in
in time.
From
of the
direction of
H is zero,
field, viz. u\ \, is
{
in the
the same must be the case for the magnitude IUJL of the vector Uj
Therefore the path of the particle must be a helix having its axis in the
H will be
centripetal force
(49).
Therefore,
we have
mu 2
=L
or
pL
mu<
Tr
-u\H
= -Hp.
(51)
Ill,
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
29
we
77
is
get simply
-Hp.
field
(52)
c/
30.
and in
j3-ray
(p,
E) and
(p',E') denote the total momentum and energy of the system in the two
systems of inertia S and 8', respectively, the connexion between the
primed and unprimed variables is then given by (32) or (37). The invariant (34) will for such a system always have a negative value. For
w 2 c 2 and, keeping
n =. I this invariant is, according to (35), equal to
is
>
we
inertial
in (37),
momentum
we obtain
v-^P
2
and, since p
E 2 /c <
2
0,
we have
E>
for the
(53)
is
arbitrary system of inertia 8, then u also denotes the velocity with which
the system i^ as a whole moves relative to S.
If the s\ stem 8' in (37) is identical with the rest system 8, we get the
equations
^
-
^
~~
\/(T-i2/f~V
total
momentum and
particle
t
M=
It
J(T-u*lc*)'
(cf.
a mass
equation
M given by
^1*
** = *~
)).
From
(54)
-JL
**
we then
see that
(55)'
v
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
78
EO/C*
E/c
III,
which, by means of
= m +T/c
30
(38),
(56)
where m
denotes the
is the sum of the rest masses of all particles, and
total kinetic energy of the particles in the rest system.
With the expression (56) for the rest mass of Sj the equations (54) for
momentum and
2
equal to T/c
The invariant in (34) can, by means of (54) and
.
p2-E*/c*
(56),
be written
-Mlc*
(57)
Equation
kind of energy.
Starting from the assumed general validity of the conservation
theorems,
&m =
To prove
this
~.
c
(58)
'collision'
of the system
..
Before and after this collision process the particles in Sj are free; therefore the total momentum and energy of S t before and after the process
are transformed according to equations of the form (32) and (37).
Subtracting
momentum
now
equations before the collision, we get if (Ap, AA ) and (Ap', AJ?') denote
the difference between the momentum and energy of EJ before and after
7
S and
S', respectively,
(59)
Ill,
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
30
79
is
an invariant.
When
the
the
8 in which Ap' ==
possible to find a system of inertia S'
and if u is the velocity of S relative to S, we get from (59)
Ap
0,
AK
u A//r 2
A comparison of these equations with (-2) and (23) shows that we must
assign to the energy &E transferred to H a rest mass
2
(02)
C"
and a mass
Am
relative to 8,
which
is
S had been added to the system X 2 The invariant (60) can now be written
.
|Ap|2_^|l
in analogy to (35).
mass
^ _(Am
2
)
(64)
tum
Do
is
body contributes
by
(59).
Further,
if
mass of a body
From
is
(64), it
E has a
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
80
30
III,
>c|Ap|
|A#|
may we speak
(65)
all
the relation
p*-~<
holds, the system has a real rest
(}
mass defined by
(64), i.e.
by
p|_.
C"
In the case where p\'K\l< ^
will also be zero.
t
>
H2
(67)
is
is
a system of
fields
v-A'
P 8 /pI
(|v|<c).
(08)
must
also be zero. It
is
in
Now it may also be shown that, conversely, any material particle with
UKLATIVISTIC MECHANICS
30
Ill,
the mass
rest
81
and
in particular in the
c2
viously has a real meaning only when a process exists in which the
energy represented by the mass of the particle can be transformed into
To prove
this statement,
liberated
considered system
in
S and $,
respectively,
we have, according
Ap = Apo-, U~
where u
^J(1U
to (59)
/C")
Since the
Ap
where
EQ
denotes the
A# = E
0,
(70)
momentum p
The
c2
u/c
(72)
then be
3595.60
we obtain
__
EQ = m
or
E = EQ +T =
C2
2
me 2
u must
(73)
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
82
(29)
The quantity
meaning. The energy
and
III,
(22).
30
introduced
(72) is called
E = me
(74)
which states that any energy E has an inertia corresponding to a
mass E/c and that any mass m represents an energy me This theorem
2
mass involved
in this
theorem
is
One of the
basic
given by
(74).
Mass
of a closed
system
of particles
two clay
first
balls of the
travel along the same line with velocities of equal magnitude but
opposite in direction. The total momentum and energy in the centre of
S'
gravity system
p
where
which
T
iS'
0}
//;o
2m
c2
+T,
(75)
momentum and
(2m +2*>/c )u
By
ball
the inelastic collision, the two clay balls will unite and form one large
on account of the theorem of conservation of momentum applied
;
Kmstoin,
JRelativitatspnnzip
(1911).
have zero
Ann d
3
RKLATIVJLST1C MECHANICS
31
Ill,
83
developed
is
The day
where
tion of
and
is
_.
the rest mass of the ball after the collision. As the conserva-
(76 a)
/77\
710
now has
momentum
i.e.
must be
(77),
we
get
Jlf
-----L>
(79)
-|
\j
e.
{}
is
energy.
For the energy of the ball after the collision in tf,
to (79) and (77),
C*
- ~" C T
-
which
~'
we obtain, according
'
<>
equal to the total energy (7()/>) of the balls before the collision,
in accordance with the theorem of conservation of energy in #. For the
is
we
and
obtain, however,
I
i\
no
(81)
by means of
(7(5/>), (79),
and
(77).
This difference
is
thus an invariant
To
give an illustration of the inertia of potential energy we now conX consisting of a certain number of particles which are
sider a system
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
84
31
III,
forces,
is
constant in time,
particles in the
i.e.
T'
+V
=--
//'
constant.
(82)
However, the total kinetic energy is, of course, not constant in general.
so
We now adjust the arbitrary constant in the potential energy
that
--
in
any
state
where the
particles
Among the possible systems of inertia S' we now choose that system
S in which the centre of gravity of X is at rest. The sum p of the
momenta of the particles is then obviously constant and equal to zero
in H. In a system of inertia 8 relative to which /S is moving with the
velocity u in the direction of the #-axis, the sum p of the momenta of the
particles
is,
where again
according to
w?
is
(32),
given by
the sum of the rest masses of all the particles. Since the
dependent.
However, p
is
momentum of S in
where
T-\- V
is
we have to take
rest
mass V/c 2
to p, the total
as
S, since
V has a
is
momentum
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
31
Ill,
85
"=
total
momentum
;,->
^ m +H/c
Q
(86)
//
is
we
8 has a
it
A
Am = ^.
(87)
c2
This fundamental relation connecting the binding energy and the mass
defect, which is a special case of Einstein's formula (74), has now been
verified experimentally with great accuracy in
many
nuclear reactions
32).t
(cf.
In
and
elecl
pl
the
raQU^l
ftf/c )-*
momentum p 2
cloud chamber
is
momentum
is
trans-
<f>
t The possibility of such an effect was first discussed by P. Langevin, J. de Phys. (5),
3, 553 (1913).
J F. C. Champion, Proc. Roy. Soc. A, 136, 630 (1932).
RKLATIVTSTIC MECHANICS
86
32
III,
conservation of
(if
they hold at
valid in
all).
in
KKJ. 11
the laboratory system 8 such that p t is parallel to the #-axis and p t lies
in the #y-plane. Then, if the momentum is conserved, p 2 also must lie
in the a:/y-plane.
-= 0.
equation to (32 a)
which holds
for
each particle separately as well as for the total momenE of the system, we then get, since p -- p l and
E = E^m^c 2
c
+m
2
(l~^f/r )"s the following expression for v:
Pi
Since p'2 -pi, the two particles have the same initial velocity u'
relative to 8' Since, furthermore, particle 2 was at rest in S, the velocity
'.
must be equal
v,
IE'
and
8,
i.e.
(89)
Ill,
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
32
87
=
=--
Pa
Pi
Pi
E'i
E*
\E'
..g/-^
-/,-,
._
will also
-*?=*.
From
Fig.
we
<..,
4~
tan 9 ~-
tan
<f>
2"
Plx
we
P2jr
momenta
of the
two
?;
tan0tan<)&
-y l
into (92)
we
finally get
"
(93)
71+
(lul/c
(94)
)-*.
Thus, the product of tan0 and tan^ is independent of the rest mass of
the particles (as long as they are equal) and is a function of the velocity
of the incident particle alone.
In the limit -> oc, we obtain the corresponding formula of Newtonian
mechanics. In this limit,
c,
yl
and
tan#tan</>
1,
.e.
or
6+<f>
ITT.
(95)
a-particles
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
88
compared with
When
light,
HI,
32
however, y l
tan 6 tan
cf>
<
>
and, thus,
1,
which shows that the angle between the directions of motion of the
particles after the collision in this case will be smaller than \TT.
is well suited to an experimental test
Cloud-chamber pictures of the collision of
j8-particles with electrons at rest in the chamber allow a direct determina-
of relativistic mechanics.
tion of the angles 9 and <. It turns out that in many cases #+</> is considerably smaller than 90. If, in addition, the velocities, and consequentlv
also
y 1? for the incident /?- particles are known, we arrive at a direct test of
mU =
(96)
e
If,
H?.
electric field
In the time
small.
distance
l/u
is
-*-*
perpendicular to the initial direction of motion.
If, therefore, the electron traverses both a magnetic and an electric field
of the above-mentioned kind, simultaneous measurements of
f See ref., p. 85.
M. Abraham, Ann.
d. Plnjs.
//, p,
E,
I,
Ill,
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
32
89
particle in
known
electric
and magnetic
is
From the results obtained at the end of the preceding section we should
expect the mass of an atomic nucleus in its ground state to be always
smaller than the sum of the masses of the constituent nucleons. According to (87) this mass defect should be particularly large for the stablest
nuclei with large binding energy. Measurements of nuclear masses by
means of the mass spectrograph have confirmed this result and in some
cases the
mass of the
whole nucleus.
As soon
which
nuclei with a given mass defect are transformed into nuclei with other
mass defects it also became possible to test Einstein's formula (74)
nucleus
(JLi),
thus forming a
two
is
unstable and
Among
RELATIVISTIC MECHANICS
90
32
III,
IU+\H - JHe+JHe.
(98)
The masses
Now,
if
we
is 7
is
put equal
the hydrogen nucleus and the helium nucleus, the corresponding figures
for JH, |He are 1-0076 and 4-0028, respectively, f Thus the loss in mass
m=
mass
units, or in
is
2x4-0028
7-0166+1-0076
0-0186
grammes,
m=
10- 25 gin.
0-309
me*
27-7
(99)
0- erg,
(100)
a-particles
a-particles
of the
ex-
difference
!7-28()-03MeV
(100)
---
and
6
(27-60-()5)x 10~
(101)
is
excellent.
erg.
(101)
The deviation
is
an error in me 2 of
x 10- 6
is
of the order of
mass may be
many grammes.
where the nucleus is divided into two fragments, an energy A A is
2
developed whose mass Am = A//c amounts to about a thousandth of
the mass of the uranium nucleus. By complete fission of all the nuclei
in 1 ton of uranium the mass of the heat developed would thus be of the
Tri
order of magnitude of
kg.
,384 (1937)
.see
KELATIVISTTC MECHANICS
32
Ill,
91
Modern atomic
EQ
c2
energy
in 1932f
it
became
do exist in
and
a
negaton) are
positon
(a
the energy of this radiation equation (72) could be verified. The reverse
process, in which electromagnetic radiation (light quanta) is transformed
into pairs of positive
light
quanta
energy of
and negative
2r/?
2
.
Summarizing, we can state that all consequences of relativistic mechanics have proved to be in complete agreement with the measurements.
The objection which could be raised against this statement is that all
these measurements were performed on atomic particles, electrons and
nuclei, etc., which in view of the existence of the quantum of action
classical
is
theorem, given in
system without any limiting assumptions regarding its constitution.
Moreover, in all experiments on the deflexion of electrons in a macro-
f C. J>.
and G
933)
P.
M. S Blockrtt
M. Dirac, The Principle* of Quantum Mechanic*, 3id ed., (Kfoid 1947, 73.
S. H. Noddei moyoi
See also
Pht/tt lt<v. 43, 1034 (1933).
Kasetti, L. Meitner, and K Philipp, Natunv. 21, 286 (1933), J. Cune and F. Johot,
P. A.
C D. Anderson and
K.
CM.
IV
S and
t'
0,
space-time coordinates is given by a homogeneous Lorentz transformation, i.e. by a homogeneous linear transformation leaving the quantity
s 2 (II. 13) invariant, i.e.
s2
in ^
x 2 +y 2 +z 2
xl
x'i
x,
x',
c 2t 2
x2
y,
x'2
= y'
a?
x'3
~
=
2,
#4
2',
x\
=
=
c 2t 2
s' 2
(1)
ict
ict',
where i
1) is the imaginary unit, the homogeneous Lorentz trans<j(
formation can thus be characterized as a homogeneous linear transformation
(=1,2,3,4),
(3)
k- 1
which
satisfies
the condition
=!>;= 2 x?.
i
Here the
(4)
oi
ik depend only on the angles between the spatial
and on the relative velocity of the two systems of inertia.
Since the coordinates x 1% x 2 x 3 are real, and # 4 is purely imaginary in
axes in
coefficients
S and
S'
while
if
iK
and a 44 are
a l4 and
4/c
real,
If the variables (x t )
inter-
preted as Cartesian coordinates of a point in a four-dimensional Euclidean space. Then the transformation (3) would represent a simple rotation
of the Cartesian system of coordinates in this space, the distance
(4)
33
IV,
93
(0, 0, 0, 0)
being invariant
by such a rotation.
Now
natural, even if # 4
it is
and
is
geometry
now be used
in the
= ^ x\
=-
2
2
x*+y +z 2 -c
0.
(6)
This surface is called the light cone, since the equation (6) describes the
propagation of a spherical light wave starting from the origin
x
z
y
at the time
0.
The
light
s2
and
x 2 +y 2 +z 2 -cW
x 2 +y 2 +z 2 -c 2 t 2
<
>
(la)
(76)
0,
0, i.e.
the event
(a?J
(x,y,z,t) is simultaneous
is
^=
where the X
t
{
(X^)
by equa-
(1909).
(8)
.
These
FOUR-DIMKNSIONAL FORMULATION OF
94
33
IV,
If it
goes through
domain (la)
since
the velocity of the particle is always smaller than the velocity of light.
Then we can always introduce a system of coordinates $' such that the
#4-axis coincides with the time track of the particle. In ordinary physical
space (3-space) this means simply that we can always introduce a system
of inertia which follows the particle in its motion.
Let us now consider two arbitrary events with coordinates (xj and
(:r ) in *S
By transition to another system of coordinates 8' both sets of
Y
form
(x l
I (a,--?,)
I (*'-%)*
(9)
must be an invariant. The quantity (9) represents the square of the fourdimensional distance between the event points (x and (I*,). Since both
2 #? and 2 ** arc invariants it follows at once from (9) that
t
also
is
an invariant.
(3) for x\
and
x\
we obtain
2 (2^
t
According to
:r
'
'
when the
^ 2 (l>,/^mH^ml,m
a
/)(2
m *m^m)
(xt )
'
must be equal to
and
This
(x m ).
is
J xi^i f
a " indepen-
2 a //^m
8 /m
(M)
uhere
is
8 /wl -=
(0 fur
]
lor
i~
m
m
,,
rt
(12)
for
if
we use
(3) in
2 x \<*ik
i
=-
2
1,1
<*ti
xi<*tk
we
get
= 2 */(2 a 7/fA-) = 2 x
i
<.
by means of
8M
x k>
(11)
IV,
33
Using
argument
as in the derivation of
The conditions
(11)
and
1 1
95
a, A., i.e.
(15)
we
.e.
(15')
The
are given
Lorentz transformation
(II.
24)
(16)
\ivy/c
where y
(l
(17)
y,
iiy/c,
tant/f
ivfc.
(18)
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
96
(17) represent
i/r
is
a rotation in the
(^ 1
IV,
33
^ 4 )-plane, but
34.
is
S'\
Fi
which
is
Fig. 12,
drawn
as
if
12.
>
ifj
were
real,
on!
the
The length
in S,
i.e.
Since
it
same # 4 -value)
all
---
(1H).
sec^
Equation
(l-?;
/c
(19)
-,
(19) is the
Lorentz contraction
IV,
'
34
97
given by a straight line parallel to the x^-axis, and the proper time r
be this line, and let
a measure of the length of this line. Now let
Cl C2 be that part of the line which corresponds to the proper time r.
is
is
(20)
ry,
In this representation the Lorentz contraction and the clock retardation effect appear as a kind of perspective shortening of measuring-rods
and time
sentation
intervals.
is
However,
it
'angle of projection'
ifi
is
must be emphasized that such a reprealso manifest from the fact that the
is
an imaginary quantity.
of the
On
four-dimensional
epistemological significance
representation
should not be exaggerated. In spite of the formal symmetry between the
description of space and time in the theory of relativity there is still a
it is
not possible
by any admissible 'rotation' (3) satisfying the conditions (5) to transform the time axis into a space axis Only those rotations have a physical
meaning in which the r 4 -axis remains within the domain (7 a), i.e. inside
the light cone
(6).
35.
In spite of its purely formal character, the four-dimensional representation has been of great significance in the development of the theory
of relativity, since it allows us to express the covariance of the laws of
nature under Lorentz transformations in a particularly simple way.
Each law of nature expresses a certain relation between physical quantities. These quantities are defined
by the procedure to be applied in their
measurement. Let A, #,... be such a set of physical quantities measured
by
A,B,...
3595.60
u1
Among
the quantities
98
35
IV,
**} =
,...,**
0**
<>*,
(21)
<>,
where
is
coordinates.
A'
will generally
of (x
).
(jr't )
than
is
(21) in
S can in
S' be expressed
A BB
'
',H',...^
t
,
;,. .)=,0,
^'L
I
(21')
where the function F in (21') on account of the special principle of relativity must be the same function of the arguments (A', #',...) as is the
function F of (A, B,...) in (21), i.e. any relation between physical quantities must be expressed by means of form -invariant or covariant
equations.
When the problem arose of expressing the fundamental equations in
the theories of electrodynamics and elasticity in a form independent of
(3 +- l)-space, it is there-
to
equations.
As we
was possible
for all
it
t P. A.
chap.
xi.
ol.,
Oxford
19-47),
IV,
35
90
The four-dimensional
element or interval.
line
Four-
vectors
Consider two neighbouring points P and P' in (3+l)-space with the
coordinates (xj and (x^dx^ in an arbitrary system of coordinates S.
On account of (9) the square of the four-dimensional distance between
these points
is
given by
This expression for the line element or the interval defines the geometry
in (S-fl)-space. The infinitesimal line connecting P and P' is now the
defined
by
its
Now, a four-vector
is
'i
=2
i.e.
we have
ik <fak-
which
23 )
relative
every system of coordinates has four components (a t-) which are transformed in the same way as coordinates (x^. Thus, to the rotation (3), (13)
to
ak
***>
for the
magnitude
(4) it
24 )
of the four-vector', or
?
is
X-*
In analogy with
of the
=2
!?
(25)
an invariant.
According as the invariant (25) is less than zero, equal to zero, or larger
than zero, we speak of a time-like vector, a zero vector, and a space-like,
vector, respectively.
For the infinitesimal vector (dxj connecting the two neighbouring
and P', (25) becomes identical with (22), viz.
events
cfo*
dxt
d(7
-c 2
eft
2
,
(26)
where do is the spatial distance between the two space points in physical
in the time
space in which the two events occur, while dt is the difference
of occurrence of the events.
0. If P'
the equation ds 2
on the
P as centre is defined by
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
100
36
IV,
(a
and
(6 t )
can be formed
(a^-f-ftj.
magnitude of
this
+M
ii
-2
it
is
also
an invariant
in
two
to each other
The
when
analogy with
(10).
Two
vectors.
The quantity
zero.
is
three components of a four- vector behave under spatial rotations like the components of an ordinary spatial vector a. Therefore, in
first
(,)
is
(a,a 4 ),
(28)
(a,
4)
way
as
we have obviously
a'
+ V-
"'"
'
'
(29)
When
the vector
is
time-like,
i.e.
2>?=
|a|2-|a 4 |2<0,
(30o)
<
in this system.
^a* =
|a
*-\atf
).
If,
>
0,
is
(306)
we can
which a 4
0.
IV,
36
new time
at 6t
37.
a;6J
101
for, if (b T )
for
denotes a
1, 2, 3, i.e.
0.
vector. Four-
ray velocity
Let us
now
consider the motion of a material particle and the corre(8) in the (3+ 1 )-space. We can also use a parameter
('=
^()
1,2,3,4)
(31)
parameter r defined by
Using
(32) in (26)
_
-
1CT
we obtain
c2
dr 2
da 2 -c 2
dr
is
dt 2
(33)
equal to dv/dt,
= (Iu /c*)*dt.
we
get
(34)
Thus r is identical with the proper time of the particle, i.e. with the time
measured by a standard clock which follows the motion of the particle.
The proper time of a particle is a measure of the length of the time track.
The time track corresponding to a uniform straight motion is repre-
sented by a straight line as, for example, the line t in Fig. 12, which
connects the two events A and B. The length of this line is given by
T>
<'--'VHJ)'
(35)
by
(36)
Since the expressions (35) and (36) hold in any system of coordinates
can, for example, perform the calculation in a system of coordinates
we
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
102
37
IV,
we introduce a system
we must have
*:-<
1C
s1
.
(37)
1C
The straight motion is thus characterized by the fact that the length of
the time track in this case has a stationary value, viz. a maximum, compared with all other possible motions connecting the same two events.
Since the coordinate increments
(r/.rj
particle
will also
From
where
is
(40)
four-vector which
Thus the
c2
four- velocity
by differentiation of
for
from
(39)
.,
is
(4 1)
we
get
(II. 56).
given by (39)
for velocities
and
we
to
IV,
is
37
and from
(39)
we
get for
103
its
components
(42)
where
du
-
r/
-x
2
rf/
is
system
components of A are
t
^'.-(a',0).
(42')
Here, n denotes a unit three- vector in the direction of the wave normal,
the frequency ?r is the phase velocity, and A is the wave-length of
v is
the wave.
As the phase
is
,A
(3),
must hold
for arbitrary
x k we get
,
24,
velocity u'
with (39)
w' -
we can
components
where u
w'
u'
c/n,
we have
cri
icn
(46)
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
104
From
--
U\oL tk
and
(45)
o-
5X
"',
(47)
<>.
>
(43)
Uk
SX ",
i.e.
37
IV,
and
f^
we obtain
or
w;
(u.n).
(47')
(47) thus expresses simply that the phase velocity is equal to the projection of the ray velocity in the direction of the wave normal in any
system of inertia.
While the square of the magnitude of (U
we have
is
c2
constant, equal to
Thus, for a light wave in empty space the phase wave vector
is
a zero
vector.
38.
energy
way
as the
Pi-- (p,iM/c)
(49)
proportional to the four-velocity (39) and the factor of proportionof the particle, i.e.
ality is equal to the rest mass
is
p,
On
account of
(50), (49),
IP?
and
-m^.
(41) the
= P*---* -
norm
2
<
(50)
f;f
of this vector is
--
-8<- a
(< >i)
is
thus a time-
like vector.
number vector
cr
K,
(52)
/,
=-
38
IV,
where h
105
an invariant constant. If h is chosen equal to Planck's conwave is the de Broglie wave| of the particle. The
w
of
the
de Broglie wave is, according to (43), (52), and
phase velocity
(III. 36), connected with the velocity u of the particle by the equation
is
-_-
w
The theorems
*l
J.
cor 4
|P|
p-
=.-
cp 4
of conservation of
U
(52')
.
'
r2
momentum and
energy in a collision
where p^ and p are the sum of the four-momentum vectors of the particles before and after the collision, respectively. The first three equations
--(i
1,2,3) represent the theorem of conservation of momentum while the
t
-- 4,
expresses
the conservation of
energy.
In (53) these theorems are expressed in a form in which the co variance
under Lorentz transformations is obvious, for two four-vectors whose
or, since
is
constant in time,
ro
^-F
dr
The
(56)
is a four-vector, for
must then transform in the same way as the
left-hand side of (55) which is obviously a four- vector, since r is invariant.
f\
Op
H. Mmkowski,
cit
chap, u,
k
p.
58
d.
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
106
From
(41')
and
yp
, r
.._
ir^\
\
'
38
IV,
yp
jjl
__
X^
J-*
[jl
fl(
o *-i)
__
dr
jjzl
<^-4
^m o
dr
j
'
^C
^-4
jj d^>i __
l
^2
_Q
dr
dr
<
(58)
Equation (57) thus expresses the fact that the proper mass
mQ
is
con-
served.
in
forces produce a change in the proper mass of the particle. This is the
case, for instance, in an electrically conducting substance under the
- ^
*\
A ^
where
(F.u)
'(60)
the mechanical work performed per unit of time, while Q is the amount
of heat or non-mechanical energy developed per unit of time in the body.
The fourth equation (55) which, by means of (49), (59), and (34) can be
is
written
=^+.
(61)
must hold
=__
Since the left-hand side of this equation
must thus be an
in the rest
invariant. It
is
is
9 _
'
But
(62)
^
>
an invariant,
equal to the
IV,
38
107
From
longer conserved.
and
(58), (62),
(tWln
-7-
no
get
/f*A\
Vj/
64
c*
identical with the time in the rest system, (64) simply means
amount of heat developed in the rest system has an inertial mass
is
that the
m
on account of
valid only
(58),
^F
is
== 0.
dr
dr
Thus, when
^FU
dU,,dm
0u = f
dr
or,
is
dr
Since r
we
(63)
f/,
0, i.e.
c*
when
the
1'
particle; for
dUJdr
only
if
I
tf
IT \
-Jd
(JO
u = v Uif
i
0,
(65)
we have
From
amount
(63)
of heat
plying (63) by
Ar^l
u 2 /c*) we
In Chapter VII we shall see that the equation (66) also holds for any
amount of heat conveyed to a system in a thermodynamical process.
108
39.
Tensors
of
39
IV,
rank 2
By a
has 4 2 components
(t lk )
it
is
relative to
in
coefficients as in
equation
(3)
67 )
which defines
to S'.
For the sake of simplicity we have here omitted the sign of summation,
substituting it in the following by the convention that an expression in
which a Latin index, like / or m in (67), appears twice shall be summed
over this index from 1 to 4. Free indices like i and k in (67) can assume
independently the values 1, 2,
in the future be written a l a l
values
1, 2,
3 it will
in
a|
The
a a
t
3.
is
a direct generalization of an
where
In the same
way it is
an invariant.
(11)
we obtain
seen by
and
ik l ik
__
.,
.,
hmhm
relations (11),
IV,
39
If a Lk represents
space,
r
and
,a
we have
(67)
is
109
reduced to
C=
aiA<V*A/i
*'i4
== a
^4*
*^4/i
a <A^A4
(72)
^44
^44
'
behaves
in
components
for
from
If a lk
(24), (67),
and
viously also
and
(II)
ik
a k9
(73)
we obtain
a tensor, t tk
t
kl is also a tensor, viz. the transa
b
denote
tensor.
When
and
the
posed
components of two vectors
which thus are transformed according to (24), the quantities
tensors. Further, if
lk is
t
',*---
will obviously
be transformed according to
is
*ik
a b k~ a k b
i
75 )
(67).
,-.
76 )
*ki>
and
/*,
is
called antisymmetiical.
Analo-
'*i-i,A
78 )
called symmetrical.
Since both sides of the equations (77) and (78) transform like tensors,
these equations must hold in every system of coordinates if they hold in
is
is
thus an invariant
110
IV,
39
^for
any
An
six
(79)
Fik =
Fkl
has only
H tK
-*,*
i.
E =
FiK9
= -tT
iF ,
(80)
4l ,
and
will,
Moreover, putting
//!
#,=
#*,
//,
#3 =#12,
we obtain
(80')
=E
19
'
E'2
(1
v 2 /c 2 )-*-.
E=
yE'-f:
H=
and
in this
(81')
yH' + -i
v2
for
40.
Angular
sional representation
Let (#J
(x,ict) be the space-time coordinates of an event point on
the time track of a material particle, and let (p t )
{p, i(E/c)} be the four-
According to
The
__
is
(76),
tensor
^ p
y.
rp
(82)
40
IV,
111
M
bv the equations
In
M=
(Mf
M,,,
xx p
= (Mn
s)
(x,)
(83)
M Mn
3l ,
(84)
).
^ ^ ^ ^_^ ^
(85)
The
By means
we
obtain,
using (38),
or,
by means of
(50)
and
(85),
dM
lk
(86)
The
theorem
momentum
^=
(xxF).
(86')
'
This tensor has thus the same constant components in every system of
coordinates and it is the only tensor whose components remain un-
a 7m
(X-kn <*/;>
4>/^>'
^kl
*row;>
a mt <*nk a j)l'
88 )
A $owr-vw^
same sense an
aiajUA^aJe.nsor^)
tensor of rank n is then a quantity t ikl ...
rank.
In
the
zero rank.
(24),
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
112
IV,
41
k and
transformation equations for tensors in connexion with the orthogonality relations (11), (14). Such a process by which from a tensor of rank
n a tensor of rank
in
2) is
formed
is
called contraction.
Equation (69),
which a tensor of rank zero has been formed from a tensor of rank
(n
components of these
tensors.
The equation
we obtain
invariant (27).
Equation
combination of both
lk
and a
contraction
By
tensor b l
lk
a k of
first
rank. In the
direct
42.
Pseudo- tensors
a
't
<***
89 )
ococ
lK
a^
(90)
x[
- -x
(91)
42
IV,
113
---
(c^Cg.rg)
((I 2
a 1 b^a 1 b 2 ~a 2 b l ).
b^-a 3 b 2 ,a 3 b l
(92)
defined by (15).
multiplied by the transformation determinant at
\oc lk
2
2
a
of
4
rank
a
is
with
Thus, pseudo-tensor
quantity
components in every
\
----
oux lt
ot
km ti m
(93)
From
this definition
The
by
43.
direct product of
2.
The
Levi-Civita symbol
which
Thus,
the only
or
according
as
is
S' its
Since
all
8'tUm is
symmetry
3595.60
(i,
A%
(94)
by the transformation,
and we need only calculate the
for which -we get
component with
= (1,2,3, 4)
&'m4 = *i,,2,,3v*4A,,,,.
/,
m)
(5)
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
114
From
by means of
thus,
and
(95)
follows that
it
(15'),
8 1234
From
43
IV,
<*
==
S 1234-
it
8 tA/m
96 )
is a quantity
equal to I, the other nonvanishing components following from this by the symmetry rules. It is
shown in the same way as before that 8 llf^ is a three-dimensional pseudo-
8 lK x
antisymmetric in
all
is
tensor.
Dual tensors
By means of the Levi-Civita symbol we can
44.
metric three-tensor
LK
associate
an antisymH by
#i=4SiKAtf*A,
H-
i.e.
(H19 #2
ff8 )
(#23
(97)
#31,
(98)
12 ).
If
is
IK
of the form
",
= A,-aA=
(99)
I'
^ = S^a^A
(100)
is
coordinate planes.
equation
M
<r
The pseudo-vector
(100)
we
<r
get
*ti
is
^1=
given by the
/im\
4< T K< r
is
(101)
c-
SHCA^A
and
a b
i
(102)
IV,
44
115
IK
fa K
dx
__ fa;
'dx
(103)
By means
v
F
ftl
=~
a2
F2
'
(104)
^2
It is invariant for
We
reflections.
obviously have
V
'
(105)
(efcq, 0, 0),
dV
(0,rf# 2 0),
is,
by
(104)
and
dx^x^dx^.
(0,
0,d^ 3 ),
(106)
(106),
(107)
is
<
symbol
tensor
8 iklm
Flk is
F*k
^um f
lm
FJk
to
an antisymmetrical
(108)
i.e.
1
= ^.
(109)
^ 23'
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
116
E ->
H ->
H,
The equations
E.
and
(81)
(81') are
44
IV,
unchanged by
this
without rotation
is
a transformation with a
same way
tensor
as
lk
1,
so that
F*k
in this
a^ k
where a and b k are two vectors, represents the two-dimensional 'parallelogram' defined by the vectors a and b by analogy with (99). The dual
l
tensor
*.
is
^-^A-<4<^-<>.
The area a of the parallelogram
is
(HI)
defined by
1,
e.
3 corresponds a dual
a pseudo-vector. If the tensor is of the form
(113)
"
''
*/
where
b^
c,
where
(iklm)
Vlkl and V
is
an even permutation of
ft
t ,
c t-.
is
V
l
(1234).
JX = FA =
vector
the vectors a p
parallelepiped
is
is
Fc
t
0.
we
by
F*=-F F = lFWm F
t
fc/m
(117)
44
IV,
117
is
(118)
am
the dual pseudo-invariant
v
-
dm
Cm
is
__ - g
__
f
iklm a b'k cl d m
S,
bm
(119)
abcd
We
have
(120)
If a p b l c
,
e ,
is
(121)
which
is
thus a pseudo-invariant.
transforma-
An
infinitesimal
the form
where the
we
in
homogeneous
x^
-x+
,
lk
xk
/s
lle
has
/ioo\
(122)
(B lk
(x\)
)x k9
*>
all
we must have
values of x l and x i
t*=-^
'
This condition
S and
S'.
Let v
123 )
(11), (14) in
connecting the
(vx v u vz ) be
,
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
118
IV,
by
(39)
F =(yv,yic)
(l-/c)-').
(0,0,0,
ic),
the four- velocity of a point at rest in S', which means that the
the direction of the a^-axis. From the transformation
J^ is
vector
V is then
F;=
since
(y
45
lies in
we then
Vk
z
get
V\oi lk
3)
#'
and
(.)
__
___
__
~~
~~(o
<o
(t=l,2,3)
8*.
d)>
(124)
ICOL^.
oL
lk
follow from
V
(II. 27):
-.v
"
--i(y-i)
^ (y-1)
(125)
i(y-i)
and
(125) reduces to
a I/,
& t&
lk
+
I
lk
tfc
with
IK
lie
0,
>
l4
(4
4l
41
^>,
c
44
0.
(126);
V
Let
*;
* |A * A
8-+S',
xl^oc^xl
W
r"~-U',v
X
(a^oiiLJXL
t
S'^S"
The resultant
(127)
trans-
H9^
-8
V
46
IV,
is,
same orthogonality
satisfy the
i.e.
relations (11)
119
the coefficients
and
(14) as
oc
lk
and
oL
lk
However,
i.e.
Qt!'
lk
will
not take the form (125) even if ot ik and oL ik are of this form.
if the three time axes in S, $', and S" are lying
In the special case where the transformation from S to S" is an infinitesimal Lorentz transformation without rotation, we have, according
to (126),
*ik
8 t*
*IK
'ifc
= ~
't4
4t
44
>
129 )
<*lk
8 t/+ </)/*
Let
xi
(1.30)
*ik+*il<xik'
= f (r)
t
and S"
in (127) be
^(T)
Similarly, the four-velocity
7;(T)
V't
U:+dU't
(132)
(131)
^=/,(T).
of S" relative to S is
four-velocities in S' are
= tt t^ = (0,0,0,tc),
= a ik (Uk +dUk = U'i+a^ dUk
]
(133)
(134)
transformation from
(129) being given
by
Now,
(134).
obviously,
and
infinitesin
oLik
in the
(129), V\ in
we have
C
for,
on account of (133),
(129).
this is seen to
t'ik
defined in
KOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
120
46
IV,
ij\du'-ir dv\
=
,*-* =
-ir~~- <%
The
coefficients
then equal to
oi
oc
lk
can
IT
...
..
JTr
dU
k
).
lk (r~\-dr).
(136)
..,
with
ri %k
U^lJi.
C/y
-J-A_JL_J
C/T.
coefficients
Kl
ot
^l
lk
/,
and
rj
lk
.=
on account of
and
(137)
33 X
(133).
'
\
x k oi kl (r),
/
(139)
or, if we
particle
is
).
now
Let us
T/
We
thus have
instance, have the direction of one of the space axes in
at any time a displacement of e' without change of orientation. In
A$>
is
components given by
in 8'.
Its
e ; -= (e', 0)
(141)
e l is
orthogonal to
19
= fa^r) =
e'^T).
(142)
since
e t t7<==e;C/;
(143)
IV,
46
on account of
now have
and
(133)
,
_
~
dr
From
(141).
^'.
dr
we shall
for r
<
Cf
(144)
we have
for
moment. At a
and (143) we
dr
i.e.
121
later
time
in general
er
(e,0)
=<==
(e',0)
means that the components of the unit vector considered are different in 8 and AS", in accordance with the fact that the
vector has performed a Thomas precession relative to S (see 22).
at that time. This
motion and
Let the motion of the particle be in the direction of the o^-axis, then
we have /2
Further,
time r
/3
0, i.e.
Vt
(A,
0,
U =
0,/4 ),
0,
0,/4 ).
(145)
we
= U\+U\ =
U - (csinh0(r),
U U
the equation
form
c2
we may
0,
where
(A,
(r)
\c
is
in the
(146)
zero for r
0.
Hence,
iccosh0(r)),
0,
9(r) is
therefore write
sinh
dr,
0,
ic
0,
^o
cosh 6 drl
(147)
'
satisfies
g fci
for
0.
(148)
;
/JpW
therefore
=
^dr
(epUg)Uk /c*.
(149)
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
122
On
IV,
47
To
find the
cumstance that
components
Qj
by
e o )e u)
is
e (11)
and
1)
e^
(151)
0,
-c
(152)
e u>2,
i.e.
1C
(153)
From
(124)
and
(124')
we
0100
0010
iUJ^
'UJic
(154)
UJic/
'JJic
may
be written
xl
si
Xn
(155)
Xo
T
#4
ic
cosh
dr-\-x\
is
hyperbolic
we
i.e.
(156)
IV,
47
Thus, from
and
(III. 47)
123
(156)
/3
0,
(157)
sinh~-
(158)
1
(159)
(155) reduces to
i
'
cosh-
x,
g\
i
v
i-- sinh --
-4'
(160)
*'2>
tX/2
x\'
sinh -
4- x*
cosh --
of the transformation coefficients (154) we get for the comof the four acceleration vectors of the particle in the succesU[
ponents
By means
sive rest
system
/:
$'(T)
|A
?A
u* k
l~*
\
or,
on account of
fll
ic
u*, o, o,
+~u
c
(158),
#;
(?,
0,0,0),
(161)
rest
We
angular velocity
withy
aj
(lu*/c
)-*,u
acu
From
we have
we
get
sin(coyr), 0,
<
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
124
By
IV,
47
scheme of
1AV
cos
a:
cos
sin
coy a sin/?
a:
sin a cos j8
sin
sin
(\suijS
01
a cos/?
y sin a cos/?
y cos
i^c
!^ c
c
uy cos a
-
(164)
with
at
a>yr,
ya
j8
The transformation
AS
r.
a>y
-> S'(r)
is
For r
we
oc
lk
get
(165)
==
x"'
^2
yx
\i
#2
<S"(0)
by x
we
(166)
^3 "^ ^3?
3*4
==*
0:
+ y^4
ysin^
uy
_ l.
COS /
c
I
(167)
-0
r
where/?!
27r(y
1).
47
IV,
125
0\
ft
sin ft
sinft
cosft
(16g)
(cos
I/
or
x\
cosft
x\
we
#5- sin ft x,
sinft zj+cosft
#|
by
(169)
a?g,
Thus the system S'^^) does not coincide with the system
S'(0),
but has
system
$(TJ).
This
is
T,
we
Thomas
T
get
o> dt
(y
and vT
x v in our
= vwT
1)
case
27rv,
V
VX ~dt
v*
and, since v
is
-27r(y-l)
-ft.
(170)
48.
<f>(x)
<(# t-)
^(x^x^x^x^)
in
<f>(x),
(171)
if <f>'(x') is
the two systems S' and S, respectively. In general, <f>' will be a different
function of the variables (x() than
is of (x^. Thus a scalar function
<f>
^( x i)
is
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
126
will in fact
which
is
if
<f>
48
IV,
is
(4)
* lk a k (x)
(172)
variables (x
(x[)
and
(x)
and
(x^
is
71
^_
<tf
3x k
^a
dx k dx\
~dx[
ty
lk
(173 )
dx k
dx
oL
lfe
(174)
The four-vector
d<f>/dx l is
grad^
<f>
and
is
written
(175)
g-.
Similarly, from a vector field a t (x) we can form a tensor field of rank
2 with the components da i jdx k in an arbitrary system of coordinates,
for
by
differentiation of (172)
we
get
8x m 8al
da t
(176)
curl
tjfc
{aj
^-^-
177 )
(In the expression curl lA.{aJ we shall of course not sum over i.) The curl
an antisymmetrical tensor. Therefore, in three-dimensional space it
is
48
IV,
By
zero.
which
is
*$,
8x1
Sx(
(178)
It is denoted
and
127
by
(179)
al
^A
MQH\
(180)
Cd*
_*
f
UJ
r_
3x T dx l
dx i
= QA
.
/ 1 f\
i \
(181)
__ _
__
(182)
The operator
it is
ai'
nl.
As in the special
get a tensor field of rank
of
the
transformation
cases just considered, this is a consequence
equations for tensors together with the equation (173) and the orthogonality
contraction
we then
relations (11)
and
(14).
From
a tensor
dt ik /dxl
of rank
1, i.e.
a vector
div 7
which
is
field
3,
ik
of rank 2
field
div.ft-J
ui*/
~,
dXk
Flk
we can thus
(183)
ik
ourl, w
is
* = curU**}
>
<
184 >
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
128
IV,
48
which is called the curl of the tensor Flk If we interchange any two of
the three independent indices in (184) the expression changes sign.
Thus, curl lkl F is zero if two of the indices are equal and the tensor
.
41
=4
independent components.
Fik
is
llc
is
equal to
field, i.e. if
n =
^
the curl of
If
identically zero,
&a
d a ic
eurl l4
/ior\
(185)
=_*-^i,
i.e.
curl lW JF
0.
(186)
in space
when
is
lk
is
which have the same reciprocal connexion as have the tensors and their
according to (108),
we have
~~
'dx
UJL>
**
2i
r.
lklm
~^
fa
\JJL' i.
(/
div,
iV
lnj
F* and
lk
curl lfr/
If a
a closed surface
a,
is
expressed by
the equation
[divarfF
a n da,
(188)
where dV
is
given by (107).
(189)
IV,
49
129
by
dv
a d
'
form
'
^xx
8<
(I90)
provided that the sequence of the vectors dx and Sx t is chosen so that the
da lies in the direction of the normal pointing away from
t
axial vector
the domain V.
dimensions.*)*
is
a four-vector
four
f-1)-
ds
J
whererfS
is
=
J
a*
^\\
dVi
),
(8x t ),
(ti
lying in the
),
=
=
(fo lf 0,0,0),
A^-
(0,0,^,0).
cte t
8a? i
(0,rfe 2 ,0,0),
dV
(0,0,0,
idx l dx 2 dx^)
(191')
where the plus or the minus sign should be taken according as the
normal to 12, pointing away from the region S, lies in the direction of
the negative or the positive time axis.
If t lK is a space tensor, we have by analogy with
dv
f A.
3595.60
J
a
/w n * da
Sommerfeld, Ann.
/
a
d. Pfnjs.
'* da *
J
a
iat
89)
and
^^
A8
(190)
^'
92)
FOUR-DIMEXSIOXAL FORMULATION OF
130
=
^rfS
<>x k
IV,
49
in (3 |-l)-space is
(t lk dVk
[i iK
Z klmn
d^x m ^ n
(193)
number
is
function of
matter
is
Mo
i.e.
is
i.e.
according to
is,
^Vd-
(III. 22),
/c
).
connected
(194)
/x
like
[A,
Now,
this point is
momentarily at
rest.
/*8
where
all
quantities referring to
In
/S
/*,
(194) reduces to
(195)
0.
50
IV,
131
In the rest system the proper mass density is thus identical with the
is thus an
mass density. In contradistinction to ^ juJJ
relativistic
invariant. Further,
it is
u 2 /c 2
we
//,
an invariant.
8 has a volume SF,
)
is
For,
if
in the rest
is
SF-
sr
/i
which, by means of
^sro-^sp,
--=
two
(19?)
^/c
or,
(196)
8VJ(I-u*/c*).
(II. 34),
according to (194), to
/z
2
)
- M
U-
=- invariant,
(198)
== /i.
(199)
Consequently the quantities on the left-hand side of (198) and (199) must
be in valiants.
Let
now
r
nates in A
</>
</>(x, t)
tion
c>(f)/('f
<f>
We
obviously have
,.,
(200)
VV .,
at
field
a(x,
t)
(201)
ct
Let us
dV
dt
un
da,
(202)
(7
where the integral on the right-hand side is a surface integral over the
surface cr, and where u n denotes the component of u in the direction of
the outward normal to the surface element da', for every face element da
moves a distance of u dt during the time dt and therefore sweeps through
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
132
By means
dV
^ J
-'
IV,
50
udV,
(203)
OV
(204)
ill
(205)
0,
%+
at
Mo divu-0.
(206)
This equation which expresses the conservation" of the proper mass can
form when we apply equation (200) to the function
(x,Z).
We
then obtain
0,
+ divOioU) =
or
ct
As
0.
(207)
is
By means
= p*(x).
(208)
IV,
50
133
U we obtain a new
T
(209)
^f,
to (39)
(210)
form
^i^i^ffi^O.
c
ox
dx t
(211)
The
forces acting
matter are partly external impressed forces, partly elastic forces acting
between neighbouring parts in the continuum. In this chapter, we shall
four-velocity, the
four-momentum of
Pl
and
Since
8F
= ^o 8FC7
-f7r^rx\
III
s*\
an invariant and 2^
is
is,
according to
(50),
(212)
*r*>
& si\
I
/LL
this particle
ni
is
(
I
>
^^) 8F
st
<^
213 )
'
form a four- vector, the four-force density. The spatial components of/ are equal to the ordinary force density and/4 is equal to the
mechanical work done per unit of time and of volume multiplied by ijc.
will also
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
134
particle considered is
Substituting from
conserved,
i.e.
when -
(p?
SF)
is
given by
(2 1 4).
described
by equation
the proper mass
when
0,
P-^=f
where f
now
50
IV,
(215)
(39)
dr
dr
ar
(218)
Since
8F
is
= Srdivu
dr
(219)
invariant,
^n = ^ = divu.
~
~r 7 o
dx k
'dx\
(220)
50
IV,
(55)
135
we then obtain
in the general
=L
where /
now given by
is
(221)
Since, furthermore,
(217).
dr
i'x^
JL^of/.^)
(223)
_._f^
mass
may
From
where
not be conserved.
(217)
of course
is
is
and
(39)
we now obtain
q-M(l-u*lc*)
(225)
TAJ
- SFAr
we again have
or,
we
and
(224),
These equations are thus generalizations of the equations (211) and (207)
where the system contains sources for the proper mass, and
it
is
in
heat conduction takes place in the matter, so that the transport of heat
therefore occurs only by means of convection. Fn the more general case
also occurs, it
must be taken
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION OF
136
IV,
50
equations (223).
51.
The
kinetic
energy-momentum tensor
= vU Vk
e ik
is
side of (223)
(228)
a symmetrical tensor of rank 2 which is called the kinetic energytensor. f (223) can thus be written
momentum
=
f^
cx k
i
e.
(229)
the four-force density is equal to the divergence of the kinetic energytensor. By means of (39), (198), and (199) we obtain the
momentum
-^ = -h,
(230)
where h is the energy density or, more precisely, the sum of the kinetic
energy and the proper energy per unit volume. Multiplication of (230)
by 8V makes the right-hand side, apart from the minus sign, equal to
the energy of the small material particle inside the volume 8V.
The three components 64l form the components of a spatial vector
which can be written
(231)
0, 4
way
be written
,0 4l
must be
i
7m
(236)
and
and
OJic
espectively.
involves
(cf.
t4
(232)
g
and momentum
density,
or
=-u
c2
(233)
p.
51
IV,
The
"<*
137
jir^ict)
(234)
Just as the quantities (231) represent the energy current density, each
row of the space tensor IK in (234), e.g.
(0*AM = giV>
(23- >)
+clivOzu)
(237)
This equation is exactly analogous to equation (227). While q/c* expresses the source density of proper mass, we see that the source density
for relativistic
mass
is
((f .u)+^)/c
2
.
accordance with
this is in
Again
%4.^~
(238)
fl+c^-'*'
^+
div(i/ 4
u)=/
and
(232),
(239)
(234).
the energy. It
tinuum, the force density
r\
^t
On
/c,
r\
(9^ K -g K x
i)
+ -^~(0
iX
x K -0 KX x )-0 lK +0 KI>
l
- f x K ~fK x
L
(240)
account of the symmetry of the tensor d LK the last two terms on the
,
momentum
^if/K-^f/p
(241)
FOUR-DIMENSIONAL FORMULATION
138
(cf.
IV,
51
w+?*^ =
^+(u.grad)m w +m
and,
when we multiply
(244)
l(t
(243)
>
for
divu
LK
d iK
(244)
(200)
and
(204),
*
(n, lK
t
W)^d
lK
?>V.
(245)
momentum theorem
-~
equation t4
4t i e. (233),
the inertia of energy.
,
The
is
an expression
for Einstein's
theorem of
o*
where h
is
uk -
uk uk
=.
-pw\ =, _ w
/t)
(246)
52.
two
S and
8'
and
who independently
means
and H' as functions of the coordinates x' and V in S'. Furthermore, the two groups of physicists can, independently of each other,
determine the charge densities p and p in S and S' In the present
chapter we shall consider only electromagnetic phenomena in the vacuum
as neither conductors nor dielectric and magnetic substances are present
here, the only type of electric currents occurring are convection currents.
vectors E'
8 and
densities in
mining the fields as functions of the charge distribution should have the
same form in 8 and 8' ( Consequently, both groups of physicists should as
a result of their experiments be led to the Maxweli-Lorentz field equations for empty space. In S we thus have, applying Heaviside's units,
.
,^TT
-~^0,
c dt
(la)
i^ = ^,
(16)
c dt
t H. Fomraip, d.It. 140, 1504 (1905), Rend. Pal. 21, 129 (1906), A. Einstein, Ann.
Fhys. 17, 891 (1905), H. Mmkowski, see ref., Chap. IV, p. 136.
d.
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
140
and
in S'
we
V,
52
The equations
quantities.
tions of Lorentz's classical electron theory.
While the connexion between u and u' is given by (II. 55),
and
yet know the connexion between p and />' or between
we do not
H, on the
one hand, and E' and H' on the other. However, it is one of the most
fundamental experiences that electric charge is conserved, a property
which, in analogy to (IV. 207), can be expressed by the continuity
~
equation
P u)
0.
(2)
This equation
(J6).
+ divVii') =
0.
(2')
for arbitrary
(2).
Defining
(3)
s[
in S', (2)
and
(2')
be written
may
~ =
and
shown that,
all possible charge and current
s and s[ must be given by
In Appendix 2
it is
(4)
0.
if (4') is
(4')
between
where
lk
four-current density, and (4) expresses that the divergence of the fourcurrent density is zero (cf. IV. 178).
/
If
we multiply
the invariant
si sl
by
1,
we
=
(3)
$Xi
(6)
an invariant
- P 02
(?)
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
52
V,
where p
is
By means
$. Hence we
of
(8),
the equation
141
get
(3)
,=^,
U
pSF-/>3F.
(10)
served during acceleration, the particle has still the charge e relative
to S. On the other hand, the particle now has the velocity zero
relative to S' and, since
it is
now
in the
same
situation relative to
previously was relative to S, the charge e' of the particle relative to S' must be assumed to be equal to the constant charge e relative
as
it
to S.
Therefore
we must have
at
any time
e'
e,
in
agreement with
53.
tensor
In every system of inertia S we now define a quantity
Flk
by the
equations
F = -Fkl
ik
(Fm
Fn F12 =
)
i.e.
H.
Hv
(Fn
-Hu
-iEx
-Hx
*
Tji
l&y
F Fn =
H,
/*
1>&Z
E,
(11)
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
142
The equations
(1 a)
53
V,
CXt
O^r
O^k,
Since the expression on the left-hand side in (13) is completely antisymmetric in the three indices i, k, /, (13) represents only four indepen-
dent equations which are obtained, for example, by putting (i, k, I) equal
to (1,2,3), (4,2,3), (4,3,1), (4,1,2), respectively. It is easily verified
that these four equations are identical with the four equations (I a).
inertia
transform as the components of an antisymmetrical tensor if the equations (13), as should be required, are valid in every system of inertia.
On
r JP*
v*
div
t
where F*L
->
H,
is
H -*
^=
'*
may
also be written
n
(14)
0,
The connexion
(15)
H'
The
an
electric
and a magnetic
field,
which
is
meaning.
H=
0,
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
53
V,
This
is
means that
143
all
v.
Relative to S' the charges will therefore move with the velocity
Consequently we have in 8' a stationary current which causes a magnetic
field in S'.
By means
of
(3)
and
(12) the
(1 6)
of the equations
(1 b) is
dE
9
~c~dt
-^0,
(17)
'dx l <dx k
i
e.
54.
(4).
in
the form
H-
curl
way
grad<A
(18)
tit
E =
A,
</>
divA + ~^-:0.
C ut
(19)
now define
four quantities
A-MA,^),
(20)
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
144
and
(18)
(19)
can be written
= 0.
'
(22)
dx l
Since
54
V,
(21)
and
(22) the electromagnetic field tensor is equal to the curl of the fourpotential which has a divergence equal to zero. Moreover, from (IV. 184186) it follows that Maxwell's equations (13) are a consequence of (21).
When Flk is given, the four-potential A is by no means uniquely deter(21); for, if A satisfies (21), the functions
L
mined by
{23)
*-*'+%;
where
is
an arbitrary
The transformation
condition.
=
If
if
is
D<A
r
satisfies
0.
(24)'
will
these equations.
we
dx k fa k
=*,
D^t = ~ s
or
(25);
l'
(26)
Four-dimensional
representation
integral
of
by means
the
four-
potential
The equations
(3-}-l)-space;
Ann.
d.
We
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
55
V,
145
down
the solution of the equations (25) on the assumption that all four
coordinates x t are real, so that the four-dimensional space is Euclidean.
Let
*,
= *.-*.(/)
(27)
that
^=-
^QA-0n< =
Now
us put
let
t/r
02
any point x l
at
<f>(x)
are
two arbitrary
dx
1/jR
R%
= R-R
R = x^x^P)
i
on account of
x (P})(x
(x
P as centre.
x (P))
(29)
cfi
we thus
we
get,
(28),
x l dx 2 dx 3
(30)
which
Rt^K^^a*.
(31)
dimensional integral over the sphere (29), provided that the function
vanishes sufficiently rapidly at infinity. For the first term on the righthand side of (30) we then obtain
</>
(32)
)+
and
)-
is
to be extended over the sphere (29). Accordin the function in the brackets is to
means that
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
146
^ ^^<
V,
72 3
55
# 4 is defined by
fl2 _
(34)
We get expressions similar to (32) for the three other terms corresponding
to k
2, 3,
Subsequently, letting a -^
domain of integration in (32)
0,
\\ill
1
in the brackets
)*,
"
"
a2
R-
Since, moreover,
"
--
r>
(35}
I''
'
^Z A 5* -"**"'
we obtain
dR
!zPi)
using (33),
dR.A dlt 4
(36)
where
(f)(P) is
<j>
is
integration,
we
477
~T
,,
v( a ~~~Pi)Pi "Pi
"
(37)
and
(30)
becomes
47r </(P)
-L
(38)
where d*x
(26),
we thus
</>
5-,d *,
A at an arbitrary point P
known at every point.
l
x4
.r
in the four-
to be real.
However,
in actual physical
real
(39)
<
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
55
V,
s t is
147
We
L around
plane
ict(P)
-100
FIG. 13.
Since
we
(40)
=~
4772
~df(p)
A
Sl
(P) in (39)
d *x
'
a^T"
J fal
5*
(41)
tensor
2ntfu (P)
P<
r,
* Si
d*X.
(42)
56.
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
148
constant.
If r
space points
56
V,
|x
we have
(43)
(Xt-Xt(P)+ir)(Xt-Xt(P)-ir).
=x
^_
ir
in the complex # 4 -plane. Since the integrand in (39) has no other poles
inside L, the path of integration can be deformed into a contour around
we then obtain
x t(*)
(39)
x\
**
xi-=x t (P)-ir
-^ dV,
(46)
where the integration has to be extended over the usual three-dimenThe function s l in the integrand is not to be taken at the time
at
the
time t(P)r/c, corresponding to the fact that all electrobut
t(P)>
magnetic disturbances are propagated with the finite velocity c. There-
sional space.
fore the potentials (46) are called retarded potentials. If in (39) and (45)
we had integrated along a curve obtained from L by reflection with
nects the field at a certain point at a certain time with the future charge
and current distributions, has, however, usually no immediate physical
application.
Let us
now
t (<).
The
(47)
four potentials can then be obtained from (46), but, since s l in (46)
on account of the retarded time variable has a rather complicated
dependence on the variables of integration, it is easier in this case to go
back to equation (39). Here we can now first perform the integration
over the space coordinates and, since s is zero everywhere but at the
points satisfying (47), we have, according to (3) and (IV. 39),
t
f Si
J
dx dx dx
*
eU
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
56
V,
Here u
is
(dxjdt)
149
(47),
is
variable # 4
The integrand again has a pole at the point (44) in the complex plane,
and near this # 4 -value the denominator has the form
R2
_d]P (x 4 _.
~~
dx^
o K>
p
dHjf
k
0/^4
a# 4
<y~P
TJ
^{Ifr Ujc
~T
ao; 4
9 P TT V'*
^*lk "k
/KA\
'
\*^^/
tc
and
Here (B k ) denotes the four- vector leading from the fixed event point
to that point Q on the time track
*
0.
(52)
*i(r)
B =B B =
2
originating from
(53)
Also
should be taken at
the point Q.
If r denotes the spatial part of the four-vector (JBJ leading from
Q we get for the denominator in (51)
-
77
by means of
477A(P)
'""VU-^/c
(IV. 39)
t-i
and
2
)
(44).
<J(l-u*/c*)
The equations
(u.r)+rc
^/(i-u
(51)
/c
r+(u.r)/c
r+(u.r)lc
Mmkowski,
eu/c
f H.
P to
(55)
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
150
The equations
(55) represent
56
V,
point charge.
If
we wish
event point P
time r corresponding to the point Q is a function of the coordinates of the
and (52), by
point P defined by the equation (53) or, according to (27)
(xM-xAPMxM-xAP)) By
0.
(56)
we obtain
Kk
Sr
/K -v
(57)
From
(21)
and
(51)
toF
we then
get
(P)' -*-!*-'*
(
<h\U,R
using (IV. 41),
or,
dU
dl*
'
Equation
u'-*^'
if
we
(B8 >
first inte-
grate over the space coordinates and subsequently use Cauchy 's theorem
in the following integration along the curve L in the # 4 -plane. Here it
l/7i
has a pole of
^R^-E^,
where a
is
a four-vector,
we have, according
(59)
^^=0,
F
where F*k
(60)
(E.H)
The
all
electric
and magnetic
0.
(61)
we
find
by
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
56
V,
means of a simple
and
151
(53),
0/>2 r 4
(
62 )
2
2
is always negative for the field
|E
Consequently the invariant |H
of an arbitrarily moving point charge. This, together with (61), involves
that for an arbitrary event point P we can always choose such a system of
|
and
field
O'in (15)
(63)
-p
_-=
= cEH
ell
<
(64)
(62).
Since dl\ldr
l^.
---
0, (58)
4nF. k
reduces to
CC
-
(l^R^
Rk U
(RJL
).
(65)
By
represents the time track of the particle, and Q is the point at which the
intersects the time
retrograde light cone from the arbitrary point
track.
Hence
is
vector
Therefore
It is
(66).
we have
( *>
-^
U RJ.
From
(67)
and
(53)
we
(67) satisfies
further obtain
(67)
both equations
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
152
V,
57
In the rest system S' of the point charge the ^-axis is parallel to fy and
to the time track L. In this system we therefore have
^'-(r',0),
where r
point
get
/>'
(68)
the space vector connecting the point charge with the space
corresponding to the event P. Since Ut R l is an invariant we
is
by means of
and
(44),
cr'
(r'
(69)
|r'|),
FIG. 14.
in
accordance with
(67')
R,
and
(68).
Uk -R k U = -( x
t
^
replace the vector x
by a vector
on
the
to
from
an
curve
L
the
arbitrary point
point P, since all
leading
such vectors have the form
In this expression
we can obviously
d*>+aU,,
(71)
where a
is
choose a vector x
,(2)
x\
r,0),
(72)
V,
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
57
153
where r
is
potentials which
was the
have
E^)
We
=-(U-lW),
which by means of
and (IV. 39) leads to-the following expresand magnetic field vectors:
er
tr
A
'
Fig. 14
(73)
(12), (72),
From
therefore
we
uxr
tiA\
'
r
I
hence
U r )(l
(r'
get
2
/ 02 ))
+ iHlE^U.
r'
into
nK\
tJJ
(76)
-^'
/J
can be written
we
V^""^
The
u,
r'
'*
is
r'
(77)
while
~H
ellipsoids,
so-called
spheres r'
of the point charge.
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
154
V,
field is
'
S', i.e.
57
zero in
4nE'
81')
and
= er
~,
H'
0.
(78)
(78),
(UXr/)
field
is spherically symmetrical
r denotes the distance from the centre of the sphere while
motion
(cf.
29).
En this case
e is
the total
i.e.
directly apply the equation (58) which is valid for an arbitrarily moving
charge, or we can introduce a system of coordinates 8* which follows the
charge in its motion and solve Maxwell's equations in this system, and
then transform back to the system S. However, the system of coordinates $* will not be a system of inertia and, consequently, the
application of this latter method requires the development of a general
theory of relativity which allows the use of arbitrarily moving systems
of coordinates. The necessary tools for an application of the second
method
will
be provided in
97 and 115.
58.
distribution.
Now we
of a given field
are
by an
Our first
V,
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
58
155
we
F
by the very
==
eE,
(79)
in this system.
Introducing the equation (79) into (III. 43), and keeping in mind that
the velocity of >S' relative to S js equal to the particle velocity u, one
easily finds
magnetic
field vectors,
S, viz.
r
e
F in the system
-,
E + -(uxH)L
(80)
This expression thus follows without extra hypotheses from the principle
of relativity.
much
if
simpler
we
four-force
is
^o
(F,0).
is
mass
system
If
we have
in the rest
(81)
*FikUk
(82)
(0,0,0,fc),
(79), (84),
and
e
c
From
(82) in
(83)
and
(81)
we
ik
Therefore
in
we must have
F = -Fik
k
lk U,.
t
i
in every
system of coordinates.
(85))
\
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
156
Since
Fki we
Flk
V,
58
have
F U = e-F UtU =
t
(86)
ilc
L>
in agreement with (IV. 57), and the equations of motion of the particle
are given by (IV. 56) and (85)
,
ar
If
we
calculate the
(IV. 39),
we
equation
(80).
components of
^ IK ^ K
v*'/
in (85)
Now
(88)
in a given external field. The problem is then to find the expression for
the four-force density fl defined by (IV. 214). This question can be
the
momentary
rest
$. These components
(IV. 2-14)
(0, 0, 0,
F k sk = (pE, 0)
The comand
the fourip)
(90)
of the four-force in
SQ
/?
for the force-density in the rest
(,0);
(91)
fo
^pE
o
(92)
(89) in
From
(88), and
***>'
(93)
expres-
(94)
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
58
V,
Further,
we
get, in
/,
U = Ftk sk U =
t
U Flk Uk =
t
field
157
tensor
(95)
0,
j TT
(IV. 215).
electrodynamics
and
the equations of motion (96) may be
equations
derived from a certain variational principle formulated by Weyl and
Born.t If we put'
_ aA* 8A,
F ~
Maxwell's
field
ik
where
'
dx t
dxk
is
is
(97)
L-JjSfdS
12
with
L
l
022
uc
sl
A-
fi
A k(98)
integrated over a certain domain fi in (3+l)-space. s t is the four-current density and /x is the invariant mass density in the rest system.
In the
first
and
si
},
L we
8L
JJL
now
place,
we
shall
A^x)
for
which 8A l
the functions
an arbitrary variation 8A i of
at the boundary of the domain
this variation. For the variation of
consider
=
J
^^
=,
(J
(99)
The condition
for
SL
(100)
i.e.
H. Weyl, Raum-Zeit-Materie,
(1909).
M. Born, Ann.
d.
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
158
59
V,
while the time tracks of the matter are varied. This means that only the
last two terms in (98) are affected by the variation. Let us fix our atten-
~>
<r<
'
"j,
dr
_ / dx
__ pPUi
__ dx,
^l
dr
which
and consider an arbitrary variation of the time track satisfyfor r ~ r l and T -^ TO. Since
r2
where dV
is
r
I
uc 2
/^j
rfX
we have
dx
dV
<
-u
rfFc 3 dr
)
/T
T>
^
Here rfm
JLC
and
rfF
rf^
T.J
rf P
</T
-r,
3
(
/w
rf
(101)
Tl
TI
dV
T2
l
dr
7 r T
/*
-=
<'
8x dr
(102)
dr
91, p. 244).
(see
Further, using
we
dr
dr
f l^
'
dr
dx k dr
tix
'
get
5 f A
o
\
^x^
f
l
i
dr
dr
d>
^
ox,.
k
xi
A
^ A,
dr
J \dx k
-4-
d8x
dr
j
dr
TI
==
f ldA -kTT
U
I
/^'y*
\ca^
'
ik
dA\
-!
r/T
ar
JJ fir (]T
k
i
s
o^.aT
f
I
l&A k
(-7^
y
\
f)
\ox l
tiA\
-
f} fY
>
TJ
^IcAo^jaT
i
o^kl
'
(\(\ \\
\
"'/
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
59
V,
From
and
this case
8L
in
Uk -^
^F
lk
we thus
(103)
159
(104)
for
to the equation
i.e.
motion
Tr
(96) of
60.
the four-
Further,
we have
l8F
where we have made use of ( 1 3) and of the antisymmetry of Flk Thus we
~
may write ji in the form
.
/.
-,
,,0.)
('06)
S,*
and
it satisfies
is
a tensor,
it is
symmetric,
(107)
-S*t,
the identity
0.
we
(108)
Using
(11) in (106)
get
by a simple
where
is
lK
tf l tf(f +fl
,#,-i(*+#)S w
(HO)
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
160
is
Poynting's vector,
= c(ExH).
W = $(E*+H
where
60
i.e.
(112)
S44 =-JF,
Finally,
is
V,
(113)
2
(114)
The equation
/4
= -(f.u)
*"
ij.
--divS
+
dW
=a!
(f.u)+divS +
^=
(115)
0,
ct
-| J W dV
V
J
a
Sn da+
(f
u) dV,
(116)
MI*
(S\
t'-wrwr
(118)
f
t
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
60
V,
p\
__i*
since
J fa K
hand
field
and therefore
also
LK is
is
161
zero.
The
left-
momen-
be written
may
Now
of the electromagnetic
we can
w="
w'
momentum
density
in
IS|
<
and
cEH
E=
//;
thus
we get
i.e.
For the
(E.H)
i
w=
61.
The
total
and
__
cEH
E/H
<x^l,
-- ^^
2ca
<^
c.
ELECTRODYNAMICS IN VACUUM
162
of energy and
magnetic
field
momentum
V,
61
0,
O lk
+K
Tlk =
where
(122)
(123)
lk
is
51
and
60.
We
have
IK
.^)
where
iK is
/i 9j\
(124)
*
'
= -^-T,. u 4 c(E X H)
u /c~)
where
,/(!
is
is
the total
Finally
momentum
T44
we have
where
is
(108)
and
(IV. 198),
(127)
7/,
is,
on account of
VI
describing the electromagnetic field. As the principle of relativity requires that all signals are propagated with a velocity smaller than or
'Ir^
where
The
Tlk
is
physical
(1)
'
the total
i.e.
= -S
4ti"
T*
where S
is
(2)^
*
T =
14
icg L
T44
-A,
(3)
where g and h represent the total momentum density and energy density,
respectively. This should hold for any closed physical system, and hence
also for elastic bodies, if the elastic stresses and energies are included.
The equations
(1) for
1, 2,
may now
be written
momentum
in differential
164
TIK
form.
is
total
The
current tensor
0.
(5)
ct
energy-momentum tensor of a
au
62
^=
divS +
The
momentum
51, p. 137).
(cf
VI,
closed system
must be sym-
*i,.
TLK
i.e
-~
TKL
is
51 and
validity of the conservation law of angular momentum (see
f)3), and if this law is to hold in every system of inertia, the equation (6)
must
components,
TA = Ttl
or,
on account of
(2)
and
e.
(3),
S/c*
(8)
u*
-^
by
S/h
(9)
can be written
which
is
momentum
7/2
corresponding to
Introducing in every
we
(l[.
>V?
where
have, on account of
'
(13)
(5),
c'.r,
in every
form
h
62
VI,
like the
>
and u*
components of a
<
four- vector.
c, i.e.
8,S
S 2 -c% 2 <0.
will
(14)
These quantities
165
four quantities
/7*,
by
transform like the components of a tune- like fourvelocity u* transforms like a particle
Tlk
for this to be
the case.
77*
__
Now
=~-
+ c lk x k
tk
(17)
kl
S and
S'.
From
'
I
^'
+ ,/**>
'
(17')
Expanding
in
e tk
we
get, neglecting
first,
77*
77*77 u
u
*ki
i
Rlk
^T + T^. =
Tlk
ik
Q.
(19)
166
For
identically satisfied.
however, also sufficient, for, if (19) is satisfied in S,
i
is
I/?'--
lfi
and
will
then transform
like
may
lK
V*k
This condition
is,
we have
(20)
be valid in
formation
U* +
62
VI,
be composed of an
infinite
number
of infinitesimal
must be
physical reasons. In
the trivial case of a system consisting of incoherent matter without any
9 1k
Uk i e.
external forces, for instance, we have Tlk
fulfilled for
^U
In this case the propagation velocity of the energy is, of course, identical
with the velocity oi the matter For an elastic body, however, the
condition (19) will in general not be fulfilled, as we shall see in 65.
In a later section ( 70) we shall meet another important case in which
the condition (19) must be satisfied lor physical reasons.
63.
four-tensor for a
closed system
Putting
(j,
T, 4
T-.
[g,
ic
(7)
may
17*
h\
(21)
be written
--
!A
(22)
and, on account
<>t
(13),
we have
also
(23)'
V
t
It
vectors.
Let us
ponents
multiply
Tlk
(1)
considered
is finite
so that
all
by
(h\(Lr,djc 3
comIf
we
63
VI,
for constant
of
# 4 the
,
first
three terms in
(1),
167
we
vector. the
l
bk
will
a.Ttk
(25)
=-
{26)
2-k
dx
on account of
If
(1).
we multiply
(26)
by
d^l
(Lr^djc^djc^djc^
finite
region
in (3
0= f^rfS =
J
(
rA
[b k
dVk
(27)
J
11
and
constant
constant,
X we now choose
Q, is
which
Tlk ^
(Fig. 15)
168
I2 1? I2 2
to the integral b k
J
12 3 is zero,
since
Tlk and
h dVk
bk
dVk
we
63
=-
(28)
ila
i2i
on Q 3
b k are zero
n
Thus,
VI,
system of coordinates
= const
- const
FIG
15.
Thus we
~--
(0,
0, 0,
\
7.
T,
get
HI
where
hence
f
J
Using
h,A.
dK.K
(29)
and
'
b,h.
rt
dV
/w
f
i
(30) in (28)
64
we
dV
O 4V
4 (.r 1'
1?
a*o,
-> a
get
=~
b'4
dV',
(30)
or,
63
VI,
by means of
and
(25), (21),
al
G =
l
169
(24),
a\ G(
= invariant.
(31)
(31')
,*<?*
fb k dVk m(21).
is
fft
=-Jfc
now
define the
(32)
further
A (XtTu-x^) - S ^-8^, - T -T -
0.
lk
kl
f,
(33)
dXj
find
by
six quantities
M - J (x,g
lk
we
-x k9l dV
~=
-M
k%
(34)
symmetry of
The
IK is,
axial vector
(35)
which
is
closed system.
momentum
vector of the
170
VI,
64
Centre of massf
64.
We may assume
that
for
is
a time-like vector
defined by (32)
30) In this case it is
(cf
always possible to find a system of inertia $, the 'rest system', in which
-the total linear momentum
0, so that on account of (32) we have
so that
a real quantity
is
{}
for
he components of
8\
{
in
G!
(0,0,0,iJ/
(36)
c)
c*G/H
--
(37)
_l
vector
M (x,0 xrfr,
(38)
In lelativistic
fidV is the total mass of the system
is
connected
the
mechanics the mass density
with
energy density by the
equation (II) We ma\ then define the eentie of mass by the equations
As we shall see in a moment, the point defined in this way
(3<S) and (11)
will, however, in geneial depend on the system of cooidmates which is
\vheie
used
own
A has
r
its
is,
according to
(38), (11),
and
xrfl
From
(23)
(39)
we now get
'
tr
)(r/ '
* )
>
-a:A^
- Ji
(
a 8 ik -
u
,
// is
<
f"
\(fi>l
Soi
Kokkcr, Rcldtn
1)
<1
A,
M H L
\thttnti,
No
.3
14,
(
(1
,~>4()
(1{)3 )),
('
C <U*
Hoy Sot A, 195, 02
)I9), ()
Ii>co, 7'/w
itnt^thcoi u
(1948)
VI,
64
171
One of the
C(S
Q
)
If
(X, A" 4 ) are the space-time
coordinates of the proper centre of mass C in an arbitrary system of
coordinates, the
l
X^T) will be linear functions of the proper time
L
(}
r of this point.
if
Further,
U -
dXl
dr
(7?
we have, on account
G,~M
The dependence of G on the
l
of (37),
(40)
momentum
four-tensor
is
m lk
thus
with
by
we
get,
by
on account of
(40).
m=
-in
Wai,
(?/?,,
f >,'
>C)
we
(41),
and
r,
n defined by
get
((x-X)Xg)r/l'
ci-A'i
(43)
We may
W 10
(42)
-=
x4
m and
.*
(41)
a
J e
"
'
^4
Xt
y*
Thus rn
is
~>/J
hx dV
X we
get
on
(44)
From
(44)
we
172
and therefore
m lk
system
get
n
since
by
definition
--
is
Thus
mass
,>
{j
'-
when equation
get,
written in the
(45)
is
equivalent to the
n
u
way
system
iS'
system
by means
(45),
where v
is
0,
-----
When we
we
w?4 =
or
covariant equation
as
is
we
xS
64
VI,
is
AS
and
is
the inner
- XOS')-X
-en///
.=
(mxv)/3/
c2
(48)
$ to Nis given by a
Lorentz transforma-
"
we
c -> oo
ft!
<
JU Q C
49 '
are left with one mass centre only, the Newtonian centre of gravity,
in general not one centre of mass but
is
the
64
VI,
173
proper centre of mass. Only if the system has no inner angular momentum is the radius (49) of the disk zero. It is true that the radius (49) for
all macroscopic systems is very small compared with the dimensions of
the systems For the earth, for instance, we have
/Varth
10 metrcs
(50)
'
JM0C
Fiom
we can draw
a certain conclusion
regarding the dimensions oi a system with given inner angular momenand proper mass
Consider an arbitrary physical system
tum
which in the rest system 8 lies entirely inside a sphere with centre at
{}
the proper centre of mass C and radius r, i.e. a system for which aU
components of the energy -momentum tensor are zero outside this
sphere.
If
where in
all
centres
we
further assume that the energy density h is positive everysystems of inertia, it is clear that the whole of the disk of mass
must
lie
we
say C(R), on the disk, this point will in the system of coordinates H be a
centre of mass, and since h is positive it must then lie inside the physical
system
We
thus get
r >>
'
(51)
'J5 c
3/
Thus, a system with positive energy density and u ith a given inner angular
momentum m and a given rest mass
must always have a Jinite extension
()
(}
in accordance with (5
positive in all
65.
L)
systems
the system
It
Jn
Chapter IV,
is
of inertia
50 51
we have
of
mechanics
in elastic continua
We
shall
now
con-
an
clastic
in space
The matter on
VI,
65
other side
vectors in
t(n)
(52)
where w 1?
(52) is
??
2,
Fio
16.
-t(n)
rf<j-ht(n< >)w 3
da
This force must be equal to the change of momentum of the matter per
unit time, i.e. d(&oV)/dt, where g is the momentum density and oV
the volume of the pyramid In the limit of an infinitely small volume,
oV tends to zero faster than da, therefore
65
VI,
by
iK ,
t,(n)
lK
(52)
may
lK
If the
components of the
be written
nK
(53)
Since
t
(52)
175
(n) an(i
LK
is
momentum
The
a
is
tensor
Tlk
which
now
equal to
is
Jt(n)rf<r,
a
where n
is
The components
l(t
rf ff
by means
= -
r/cr.
(54)
j^'dV,
Si
where the integration on the right-hand side is extended over the interior
of the closed surface a Thus \ve can define an elastic force density f
such that
*',- //,</!',
(55)
1*2
and a comparison of r>4) and (55) shows that the clastic force density
and the relative stress tensor are connected by the equation
(
*)
volume 8V
now determined by
(57)
^Sn^Sr.---^!',
where g
is
derivative
the
68 >
Ann d
Relativitatsthcone (3rd ed
i,
29;
176
65
VI,
where the U K are the components of the velocity u of the matter at the
place considered. From (57) and (58) we then get
On
0.
(g^tc^uc)
JLi-j
(59)
we obtain the
thus
momentum
is
also
expressed by (4);
absolute and the relative stress tensors
TLK =
lK
+g
uK
(60)
we
The
total
work done by
S/c
(61)
elastic forces
is
f (t(n).u)dcj
--.
11
where the integration in the last integral is extended over the interior 12
of the surface a. The work done on an infinitesimal piece of matter of
volume
is thus
f](
A = _ iT-'^sr.
^
(62)
This must bo equal to the increase per unit time of the energy inside
which
-~
rfr
/
SF
is
K
*'
(63)'
v
being the total energy density including the elastic energy. Thus
get from
(63)
and
(02)
?
h
i
01
+ ,?-(l
(.1 K
(64)
+ vJJ =
0.
(64)
flux
is
t) is
given by
r
S-Auf(u.t),
where (u
we
(<> >)
momentum
g_
elastic forces
From
(61)
and
(11)
we then
density
_. + ("'.
,66,
65
VI,
where
/x
h/c
177
is
On account
energy
vector has not in general the same direction as the direction of motion
of the matter hence
.
9i
U K-9* u
we
63),
(see
get from
IIK-IKI
i
~</c
Only
_
--
U K \^K U
/O
l
iK
/po
-*-
where h
IK
is
7^ t
(-(U.t) U K +(U.t) K U
L
)/C*
0,
not symmetrical
momentary
system A^ of the matter at the point conhave u
and thus, on account of (60), (65), and (66),
in the
we
-----
(60)
sidered,
TIK
is
rest
._ 7H)
__ /O
1
HI
tfO
*\
KI>
__ dO
--
fel
M
_- U
rfiQ
L 14
710
L 44
>
~ _7,0
II
V'
(l\>7\
9
satisfies
the equation
Ttk T?k = -A U
(68)
t ,
where
\ is
For
or,
&
= ~
1, 2, 3,
by means of
l^Tlk Uk jc*.
(68) gives
and (TV
(60), (3),
39),
(^+^vK-c
Solving with respect to
(J L
&
where
/x
h Q /c 2
(69)
we
get a
-t
-AX.
new expression
^u + (l/e*)(t.)
r~ T
for the
"
(68) for
iK
uK
3595.60
u/
with (u.t.u)
'
is
with components
The equation
momentum
XT
-j-(u.t. u)/c
(71)
178
(72)
may
The equation
-h - + M
----
Ut -
C/4
V^ U
fS
(73)
The right-hand
(74)
.u),
ris
65
also be written
Tu
which
VI,
side of (74)
is
thus an
invariant scalar
If
we
divide (74)
c2
by
we
get
for incoherent
get,
(l-w 2
)(ii.t)
/<'
(t.u)-u(u
t.u)/r
by means
lK
(76)
infinite
number
momentum
of
ways corresponding
where
is
^U
B, k
the kinetic
(IV. 39)
we
Vk
energy-momentum tensor
(7S)
By means
get
Thus we get
and (73)
for the
'
(^
On account
__
T T TT
rjJ
,,
t.A
K,^
from
^A
satisfies
the condition
(71),
(SO)
-SSc
(70),
C,
'^4
^,
-=
(HO).
(82)
63
VI,
olrtst
Putting
the equations
/,
(1)
may
179
aSffA
(83)
dx k
elast
/,
analogous to (IV
f'
last
/x,
the total mechanical energ\ momentum tensor Ttk will in general not satisfy this condition
The relative stress tensor t LK is connected with the internal deformation
of the matter
(19),
/S
this
connexion
is
given by the
any system of
ineitia |
is
body
(S5)
or
by means of
66.
(77)
and
Transformation
(83)
of elastic stress,
momentum
density,
and
energy density
Let us assume the spatial axes in the coordinate systems N and
to
iS
-have the same orientation. Since the velocity of >S relative to *S is the
same as the velocity u of the matter at the point considered, the trans-
rti
e
i
(87)
Heiglot/.,
Ann
I'lnjs.
VI,
66
we
180
From
gCt
-,
tk
For
T*^*^ -~ f^w^-h'w*.
(88)
4 this gives
(89)
comparison
of (89)
and
(72)
(u.t.u)
For
i --=
or, in
--
1, 2, 3,
4,
we
(u.t.u).
(90)
means of
(87),
In the same
and
(<>0)
way we
c,
fc
--
K-,
and from
(1)1)
(93)
may
(93)
U-
yu
y
(94)
By means
T
oft/his
(t
u)
---
tiansformation equation
it is
elation (90)
is
valid, further
(}
is 111
i.e.
VI,
66
equations
(89), (92),
1
-*
and
reduce to
(93)
iQ
'
yjc
** '
'UU^
i///
~"
'
181
U**
UZ
""'
i.e.
t(n)
is
where p
is
In the rest
P
or
e
P
the normal pressure
From
(SO)
is
(53)
normal n
where p
\\ith
and
(97)
is
~~
P^
~~
P>
educe to
^IK>
(100)
an invariant scalar f
we now
(101)
(102)
where
^>
pQ
is
system.
t
M. Planck,
Berl.
Ber
p.
d.
Fhys 76,
(1908).
jH2
From
it
(102)
diagonal
sum
total
and
(78),
is
The
vi, ^GT
J'S,
eneigy-momentum tensor
toi
lo:J )
a perfect fluid
is
then, by (77)
the rest density jj? and the temper atuie which j,s given by the equation of state of the fluid.
It the fluid is subjected to external forces with the foiu -force density
The pressure
rxt
a Junction
/>" is
/>
of
may
OJlk
*k
CXfc
-.
r2
Let us assume
>xt
i
//
r2
xk
r2
dr
dr
(105)
Pjt\
which
satisfies
the
xt
The action of these forces will then not
identity (IV. 216), P,/;'
creation
of
to
rise
an\
pioper mass It is different, however, \Mth
give
=V
<)jc
--
*-
^dtv u
(106)
'
c-
'ojc
ming we now
Multiplying (8(5) by
the
get
equation analogous to (IV 226)
dx k
c2
f~.
c2
c2
and sum-
V/
rj
dx k
represents the source density of proper mass. Only if the fluid may be
considered as incompressible do we have dUk /dx k
div u
0, and the
VI,
67
By means
of (107)
we now
183
get
(109)
/Ti
(*>T
('Ei
(86),
we
<
^
(no)
dr
(66), (70),
(in)
G - gF =
1
(112)
From
these equations
we
momentum and
energy,
the quantities (G, (i/c)//), do not form a four-vector in this case.
This is not in contradiction with our general result in 63, because the
e.
system is not a closed system. In order that the quantities ^t />, u can be
constant throughout the body, the fluid must be contained in a vessel,
the walls of which will act on the system with forces which are not
,
From
(112)
we
find,
however,
G -**?.,.
C*
II+pV
(113)
which shows that the system has the same momentum as a particle with
The quantities
H+pV and rest energy E =
energy E
H+pV.
(114)
184
Scalar
68.
meson
fields.
General
VI,
68
field
theory
While the iorces between the atomic nuclei and the outer electrons
the nuclei indicates that the nuclear iorces are of an essentially non-
meson
the scalar
field is
x
function
field
F(.r t )
d 2lF
W* -K T--0
2
or
Here K
is
field
F,
<F
ar
,
t
^YL- K V\'
These equations
may
where
In
fact, if
(116)
J i(T,
TJ dZ
== 0,
^ -i^F^-f^Y
il
the variation S XF -=
of
is
(117)
(118)
).
ST^rJ
boundary of the arbitrary four-dimensional region of integration we
X
have, since S F,
f
J
r/X
- r
f SiWi;
I
8 F+ ^ 3 I^ dX
(^
\0T
f^
X
f
J
(119)
If
Now,
as this e\})iession
considered,
we
is
to be zero for
X
any vaiiation of F of the type
get
Yukawa, P?oc
VI,
68
meson
scalar
field is
185
given by
~m
~
the equation
is
(121)
-*
(122)
dx k
Ql^Qlfa) -
(#Vi), Q*(*
),
by a
(123)
-).
where
is
SJfirfS-O,
(124)
(125)
---
A!(<^, Q\)
first
derivatives
(^
d(n
~
field variables
and
their
(126)
d*i
field
n->
1 -7 )
is su])posed to
following fiom the vaiiational principle (124). Since
be an invariant, the equations (127) will have the same form in every
system of inertia
In virtue of the
field
+8
is
now
'*
(129)
gi-*
In
fact,
we have
'
8xk
(128)
bQl
QQ^
ar,
dQ
fjQ^,
-
ftr
following
b from (126).
186
The quantity
tensor of the
When
iJ is
canonical
to
(128)
may
VI,
68
energy-momentum
field.
an invariant,
6 lk
energy-momentum
is
where
divergence-free tensor
where
iA
t,,-t u
energy-momentum tensor by a
so that
-,
-(0,,-0J,
=,-
(132)
'/
*k
/, A
vacuum
treated in Chapter
field variables
ii is
\Flm b]m -
fi =-=
AA lm
where
l
/
;--
"''-tn
The Kuler
(V
10) in
Maxwell equations
vacuum
-(.4,-^
or
--^-0
(134)
Together with the Lorentz condition (V. 22) which must be regarded as
an accessory condition, this gives the wave equation
VI,
68
This tensor
is
- I Fu
^-mM
electromagnetic energy-momentum
',.
which
satisfies
(128)
it
is
187
now
(135)
8,1
tensor (V
- -A
(136)
the equation
a/
ftr A.
kl .
VII
we
get fioni
(1)
and from
(VI.
1),
wj?
Jl
BV,
the four-force density produced by the system H (2) and acting on the
(1)
Thus the fundamental equations of a non-closed system are
system
is
of the form
^ ct
-'--!?
the force acting on the system with the tensor
where f
acting on the system with the tensor N |A is then
f
t
is
Tlk The
.
force
of
it
i.e.
ti
=-.
-*,<?,,
T lt
icg.,
3),
TM -h\
(3)
wheie
/>,
S,
and
momentum
C
-
/44>
(4)'
v
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
69
we must have
T -Tlt
--=
tle
total linear
for a non-closed
The
189
momentum and
-OS'^-A,).
(5)
energy
If
/S,
we
G (t) and
L
system in
get
G' (t
two
represent the
and G[
will
(VI. 28),
n,
momentum
defined by
W
will
-T
x
3(
~~~ i
kl~ x k Til) __
~~
p~~
--
(2')
we
(8)
f
f
Jk~~~ x k Ji
im
i
J-ki
rp
*ik'
OX^
J/lfc
=
J
(x t
(9)
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
190
Thus,
in this case,
defined
moment
VII,
of the forces
69
has to be
by
d lk
A-ai/.-f
*,
Tkl ~-Tlk
_=.
*,
A-J-,
A+^-SV
(10)
For a non-closed system the centre of mass loses its physical importance Defining the coordinate vector of the centre of mass in the system
of inertia ti by the equation (VI 39)
X(A')-
we
get,
by means of
xrfr- 1
~J/>(x,o
(9)
with
--
i,
I-
f x</ 4 rfr,
and of
((>)
(ii)
with
4,
after
a simple calculation,
(12)
The
In a closed
own
rest
system the
pjo/tet centic of HI
system
mass
in its
momentary
is
the centre of
In
fact,
For
if
we imagine
velocity
in the rest system S of the proper centre of mass, any point on the
rotating disk will be the centre of mass in its momentary rest system ( Con-
hence
m^ v v
-ffiw
et C. Mollei,
Ann
--
yir
(o>
^ _
a)
=---
(m X a),
(mx(mxa)) =
|m
r2
(14)
a.
fast-
v,
251 (1950).
(15)
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
69
191
comparison of (15) and (VI. 48) shows that the point p is centre of
mass in a system j$ moving with the same velocity v relative to 8 as
the point itself, i e. any point on the rotating disk is centre of mass in its
own
rest system.
In the case of a closed system it was possible, however, to single out
one point, the proper centre of mass, by the condition (VI. 40), which
means that the total linear momentum of the physical system is zero in
the lest system of the point This is not possible in the case of a nonclosed system
For if we apply the equation (12) in the momentary
rest system of one of the representative points defined above, the left-
hand
tum
side
is
zero
will, in general,
2)
later time.
gravity for non-closed relativistic systems is possible only for very special
external forces (see 70) There is one important exception, however,
we shall see in Chapter X, 114 Tf the ext ernal forces are gravitational
forces, and if the system is sufficiently small, it is always possible to define
as
all
centre of gravity
70. Static
Let again Tlk be the energy-momentum tensor of the system considered but let/, now be the four-force density produced by the system,
then, according to
(2'),
we have
in every
of coordinates
G =
The system
as a whole
is
J g
r/r
system of inertia
=
[
and
if,
ti
exists in
which
all
further,
S dV -
(17)
$, and
since all
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
192
70
VII,
with
=^
/LI
is
tained in a vessel under the influence of the external pressure from the
walls of the vessel.
find the total energy and momentum in a system of inertia 8 with
Q
respect to which S is moving with the constant velocity u we may use
To
^---Tl iah a mk
over the whole space,
we then
dV
and
(17),
G-
gr/r
(18)
Lorentz formula
--
r<w.u
(19)
is
of the form
* IK
-__
m
\^W
,
<>
same equations as
Classical
models
e.
(VI. 112).
of the electron
is
electrostatic in
8 we have
H =
0,
SK
-EE
+ l\E\* S
iK .
(21)
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
71
193
Let us in particular consider the case of a spherically symmetrical distribution of the electric charges. In this case the field will also be spherically
symmetrical, E being directed along the radius vector connecting the
centre of the charge distribution with the point considered. Hence
and
$'
dV
^- 61
|ET dV
8 llt
dV
S, K
Jffo 8 t(t
(22)
r"
G(
"
el
Ol
7* V(i~*/<- 2l'
vl
Such a system represents a classical model of the electron, the fundamental equations of Lorentz/s electron theory being identical with
Maxwell's equations for substances with e = /t
1.
Lorentz put forwaid the idea that the mass, energy, and momentum of the electron could
be of purely electromagnetic origin, but from (23) we see that this is
impossible, f since the dependence of the electromagnetic energy on the
velocity differs from the relativistic formula (III 31) for the energy of a
particle. Since the quantities (G el (i/c)H^) do not transform like the
components of a four-vector, we have to deal with a typically non-closed
,
equations
E =
for r
E =
> a,
<
for r
a,
=- 0,
(24)
where r is the distance from the centre of the sphere. Thus we get
from (21)
n n K Jri
1
j
el~ij
\E\ 2
for r
*<
2-4
>
dVO^
a
t
3695.80
Abraham, Phys. ZS
5, 576 (1904)
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
194
VII,
71
Here the charge is measured in Heaviside units and m^ is the electromagnetic contribution to the rest mass of the particle.
According to (V 1 09) the electric force per unit surface on the sphere is
e,
which must be
in equilibrium
pQ
where
= ---
total
,
24
a4
2,
2(47r)
The
Thus the
elastic
~--^\3
momentum
can
(28)
now be
obtained from
(VI 112)
ff'""
"
7/SA
(29)
mo
""
"
""""(l-^c 2
(T-^Va)
we
)"
momentum
/"^
i/
/^
(^'!
im--t-
F/
//
''
we should have
by Pomcare
as a
dTlk /d.r k
0,
introduction of
field
satisfy equations
t
t
fc
Mie,
liom, /Voc
Ann
d. Phijs
37,
Ml
(1912), 39,
(1912), 40,
(1913)
KLKCTRODYNAM1CS, THERMODYNAMICS
71
VII,
195
length f But the above considerations show that, as long as one assumes
the existence of an energy -momentum tensor of the system, the theory of
relativity requires the vanishing of the self-force,
e of the
four-dimen-
72.
electrodynamics for stationary matter may be derived from the fundamental equations of the electron theory by avei aging over regions in
space which are small from the macroscopic point of view, but still so
equations ior a body at rest, it is possible to find the corresponding equations in moving bodies simply by performing a Lorentz transformation
This method was used for the first time by Minkowski. j| The principle
of relativity requires ]bhat Maxwell's equations for stationary matter
must hold in that system of coordinates S Q in which the matter is at
rest, irrespective of
stars.
Thus we have
curl
in
E +~
0,
div
B :
curl
H -- D =
J/r,
div
(3D
NON-TLOSKI) SYSTEMS
HHj
72
VII,
where E, D, H, B denote the electric field strength, electric displacement, magnetic field strength, and magnetic induction, respectively.
p and J are the macroscopic charge and current densities All these
quantities may in principle be determined by means of macroscopic
E and D, for instance, are defined as the forces on
experiments in *S
a small test body of unit charge inserted at the point considered into
small crevasses cut in the matter parallel or perpendicular to the field,
and B are the corresponding forces on a
respectively Similarly,
of unit
test
D
wheie
eE,
/xH
- aE,
(32)
is
electrical conductivity
Ohm's law
sion of
Minkowski's
field
is
?E
(#>i, /'ai,/^)'
(//
a polar vector
axial vector
and an
*D
//,//,.,),
(^)
(*\H ^42^43)
Similarly, the tensor
lk
by the equations
(//,//,//)
(34)
in the
system
*S
When
(35)
(J/c,V>)
/,
f
Flk
7/, A
and J
J we thus
L
get
(v
(36)
where
is
the velocity of
relative to S.
If
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
73
VII,
we now
H, B,
Flk
7/, A
197
E, D, H, B, J,
tions of electrodynamics in
(37 a)
For in the
'
<
system S
may
rest
also
be wiitten
,,-n*
'*=-<),
(37 a')
^A
where F*^ is the pseudo-tensor dual to F, k
Using (33), (34), (35) in (37) we thus get
ordinates
p*
=- 0,
curlE-f-
curl
^
i ]l
i
where u
is
87
co-
div
0,
(38 a)
(38 b)
' 2//^
,_
(39)
^i'^k
an insulator, wliere J
--
we
get fiom
(3(i)
oi
the equations
di\
may
-=
dt
Further,
system
f't
fD
e\ er\
in
-=/>8r
--=
/o8F,
<S*
Hence
(41)
current
sum
J-pU + C,
(42)
108
VII,
73
we
get from
(3ti)
in this case
(43)
We
can, however,
make
by writing
P QJJ
'
c,
where p
()
is
matter, and
U
is
in
8Q
of the
*
,
I
9
s
l
(s,.s' 4 )
is
a four-
in
AS'
(JV.O)
(45)
Thus
H, B,
While,/, has a diiect physical meaning, the field variables E,
occurring in the field equations (38) have no simple physical significance
contrast to the field variables E, D, H, B in the rest system,
?
From
(33)
we
V'"
Its
components of
components
E
(
"
in the rest
(^Ku^B)
aa
in
j(E.u)/r_
'
F?
---
(E,0),
(49)
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
73
VII,
199
is
-(uxB),
(50)
(48)
may
be written
is
in question
.=
n jJ = / D_+(1 /l -u xH
(
.),
1^
U)/C
(52)
K ~
Thus
(D,
0) in
also
D-D+^uxH)
(53)
has a simple physical meaning it represents the force on the test body
in question measured in the system 8.
.
Further,
(see
IV
if
108, 109),
F*
1
-
nu =
k
B-^-"f
and
lk
E)
l, j^.'D/f.
(B-)/c
K*
Flk
fi*
lk
c
(54)
uk ~
(55)
^* and
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
200
crevasses, respectively, as
is
seen at once
VII,
when one
73
6=,B_ U **,
(56)
fl^H_
(57)
C
are the forces on these unit magnetic poles measured in the system 8.
The vectors
D, fi, B (or the four-vectors
v F*, K*) may thus
F K
t ,
(58)
where
8, A/m is
the Levi-
ivita
symbol defined
The equations
43
in
8 and,
hold
must
they
(58)
generally
curl(uxB)
curl(uxD)
Therefore the
field
curl
(ugrad)B-f udivB
</B
B -f
<^B
_-
(ugracl)B,
-
-(ugrad)D-fudivD
'
d*
0,
curl fi
at
divB
i
-=
(ugiad)D+pu
where
we have
c
-- 0,
..
-(-(ugiad)B,
divD =
at
C/r,
(59)
(60)
p,
dD - dD
]XT.
+(ugrad)D
d(
.
constant velocity u However, since the field equations are linear, the
fields are additive and the equations (37) must hold also in the case of
several bodies, separated
different
small.
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
74
74.
According to the
201
in four-dimensional language.
first t\vo
body
placed in transversal
8 =
- *,
K^eF^
T)
or
These equations
may
(6i)
jufi
Ft-f^Kf.
(62)
also be written
tf.^-^*^.
Ffk Uk = nH?,l\,
(63 a)
(63
ft)
(63r)
(64) aie
independent,
^^
(64)
is
(64)
L\
-~ 0,
only the
(64)
first
is
written
down
three equations
equivalent to
"^
2
(6.-,)
On account
also be written
()
+ ^I'^^W*-
The field equations (37) together with the constitutive equations (63)
and (66) enable us to deteimme the field when the charge and current
distributions are
known
At the boundary between the ponderable matter and the vacuum the
and fl must be continuous, as is seen in
tangential components of
the usual way from (51)) by integrating these equations over infinitesimal
surfaces bounded by a small rectangle with two opposite sides immeIt is here
diately inside and outside the boundary of the matter
understood that the u occurring in the definition of and fl is put equal
to the velocity of the matter also outside the
boundary
Further,
we
NOX-('L()SKI>
202
S\STKMS
VII,
74
B must
of
boundary
75.
density
V we
In Chapter
is
theory
where
given by
f
Ji
"
AA, S A.'
strength the force density in the rest system of the charge is yoE. In
ponderable matter with e and ^ different from 1 it is not so easy to find a
field
unique expression for the force density acting on the matter In the first
place, we have in general a conduction current in the rest system of the
matter, and even in an insulator
pE
it is
system
is
However,
field
let
ll
we
get
T ,f'Ji
--
I1
f)///A
.]
FJ
Hence
tl
;>(^///A
-- M\i flii
nk
It
F-H
=-
-,
^A
S,*-
From
(33)
where
in the rest
matter.
and
(34)
iK
system
is
we get
,KJ)K
for the
^H
(67)
68 )
/^-|(E D+H.B)
B llt
(69)
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
75
203
Further
(*V^42>^43) -= -S
I
S-r(ExH)
where
is
Poyntmg's
vector,
#44
and
-=-
h --
&,
KE.D + H
B).
(71)
In the rest system S and h are identical with the usually recognized
expressions for the electromagnetic energy flux and energy density in
stationary matter
(72)
where
=-.
(D x B)
J
The form of the equations (07) suggests that the left-hand side of (67)
the electromagnetic four-force density f and that *V tA as given by (68)
represents the electromagnetic energy-momentum tensor This would
is
g are due
If we confine ourselves to
this
term
they reduce to
system
is
zero
easily
In the rest
is
(73)
T
ie
=-/>E-f
-(E J)
= -E(pu+C)C
t See ref
195
-[f.ufE C]
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
204
75
VII,
we have
'
'
c
Iii
an arbitrary system
The
(IV 217)
four equations
From
we
(73)
way
-*
/.
<
momentum
the
arid
76 )
energy laws
get
to the consideiations
50, we are here dealing with a typical
of
forces
a
which
change in the total proper mass of
example
pioduce
the matter
Accoidmg
Minkowski's
Ham
elect lomagnetiQ
identity
,V,,
energy-momentum tensor
In the rest
system
body on account
ha\ e
in
(FU HU )
-*;,//
satisfies
it is
the
(78)
not symmetrical,
/A,
(79)
iS'
of (32),
>S
#?4
-^c
*c((/?
- ^) =
i(ep,-
)(E
X H)
(80)
given
rise to
this
i-it
o])
HU9, \V
Pauli,
EmyU
Tfnimodynanncs, and
I'SXR, 1, 439 (1939)
|
\ol
11,
Math
("ostnoloyy,
II
?,s,s
54,
vol
2 (1920), p
Oxford,
1934,
M7,R
Jg
C Tolman,
Tainni, Journ
Leipzig, 1933
Kelatinty,
oj
Phy*
Elcktnzitat,
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
75
bodies,
205
momentum
density to be given by
g= (ExH)^ c*
-
(81)
symmetrical in S
it is
any system S, but in any system other than S the
r
components of 8ff are not simply given by (69), (70), (71), and (81),
the expression of $^hl in terms of the field variables containing also
Since Abraham's tensor $^? ir
in the rest
system
symmetrical
is
from
(73) in a
*<A
complicated
way
In the rest
e in the rest
_ f + f/f_- 1 S
^
^
expression by the term
This term
__
y^
(83)
differs
from Minkowski's
yM>i
is
quantities in the electron theory by averaging over appropriate spacetime regions and, since the microscopic energy-momentum tensor s }k
is symmetrical, the averaged tensor lfr must also be symmetrical
But,
,v
'
t
|
(84)
dx k
dx k
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
206
and, on account of
(10),
>,,
From
tA
-,
_.
(84)
#i*
where
75
VII,
may
^~-KA>
**'*
0.
ar A
Fiom
(85)
we
see that
ti lk
will
be symmetrical only
l
and
this
is
Further,
_*,
'
^+
rA
if
^'
(86)7
V
is
non-
energy-momentum tensor of
65, since
we there
considered a closed
mechanical system, and the expression (VI 66) for the momentum
2
density was derived from the explicit assumption g
S/c which must
be abandoned in our case if we adopt Minkowski's expression for the
,
electromagnetic
momentum
density
76.
of the
forms
t See ref
p 195.
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
76
207
25 at the aberration formula (II 91 ) and at Fresnel 's formula (II 92)
which, as regards effects of the first order, are in agreement with the
in
experiments.
According to Maxwell's theory of light, optical phenomena in a rebody with the refractive index n are described by means of
fractive
Maxwell's phenomenological equations of electrodynamics for a substance with the electric and magnetic constants and connected with n
/u,
bv the equation
=->/M
87 )
At
dispersion
J -
-- 0,
0,
(88)
Now the ray velocity must be identical \vith the velocity with which
the energy in the wave is propagated In the aberration expenment, for
instance, the angle ot aboi ration is the angle through which the telescope
must be tilted in order to get the ray, e the eneigy, into the telescope
The direction of the ray velocity must therefore be the Scime as the direcWhen the energytion ot propagation of the; energy in the wave
momentum tensor of the electromagnetic' field is given, we can, however,
iind the velocity ot the energy by means of (VJ 9), e
i
u*
Sfh
(89)
wave transforms
as a particle velocity by Lorentz tiansformations. This means that the
quantity (VI 15) must be a four-vector As shown m 62, this is the
case only
if
the
u*
19).
As mentioned
tion (VI
9) in
in
62, it is sufficient to
one system
is
a strong
We
can obviously confine ourselves to the consideration of a plane wave, for in the problems which were considered in
Chapters I and II the rrxlii of curvature of the wave fronts are large com-
refractive substance.
pared with the wa\ e-length (geometrical optics) and therefore the curved
wave fronts can at each place be approximated by plane waves,
As shown in Appendix 3, the most general solution of the field
0, representing a plane wave with the wave
equations with p -_ 0, J
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
208
normal n
(x.n)/ W
-.
" -
"
'
"
^-|x.n)At')
e(1
^
00)
,-
"
/
v/x
V/u,
(2)
(1)
.e<
2
>)
(2
=- 0,
=- (e (1
>,n) -- (e >.n)
(91)
(x n)/w, and
--
(e^e,,)
w=
is
76
E _/(<"
/and
VII,
(92)
S-r(ExH)^
where
e -= (e t
(72)
VM
X e2
(68)
f/ +f/ )e,
(93)
^- n,
(94)
hHence
i
u*
|(e
Further,
H/
(95)
'
_e
i/*e
--=
w,
system
^// )-/
From
we
(96)
we
get,
(S, ich)
is
(96)
by means of (VI
= (r f ?
)-
15
and
12),
e, ic
(98)
+f7> ^,
t
since
on account of
^
(91).
1)
d -f'^
1)
(
i
2>
4- g
^K
(99)
8 tK
*+!/
K.
(100)
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
76
200
we then
get,
by means of
and
(97), (99),
(100),
R lk
defined in (VI
components;
y/
transformation coefficients
with v
v',
e (lc in
(VI
maybe
120)
is
17'),
We
using (104).
u*
=-
--i
(
e+v'
is
in accordance
}
}
(106)
<J(JJ.)
which, of course,
given by (IV
this quantity
then get
with
(II.
55)
if
we put v
v'
and
u
{c/^(jji)}e in this latter formula and neglect terms of order higher
than the first in ?/. For the magnitude of u*' we get
=-
n
in
Scheye,
(107)
Ann d Phyv
p
(II. 92).
(4),
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
210
76
VII,
On the other hand, if we adopt Abraham's expressions for the energymomentum tensor the equations (90)-(99) will still be valid in the rest
system, but instead of (100) we get from (81)
.
Hence,
A.
i
'
ff
-w^
To
O
^
we
fO
9\xv
<7
Jt
e ~- &
f\
O\
will
will
we again
use (104),
17'). Hence, with Abraham's expression for the energytensor we get for the velocity of the electromagnetic energy
and (VI
momentum
in the
/ 1
(108)
,,.
CL
(105),
1\
i)
(&
>S"
system
e+v'-
(v '- e)c
+ (v' e)l-
Me,
(109)
From
we
(109)
is
being
even
of first
order
medium
in r'
of refractive index n
Further,
we
see
1,
the deviation
measure
very
moving transparent media
Unfortunately
difficult to
it is
from
differs
the phase velocity even if v' and e are parallel, in contrast to the ray
velocity which in this case is identical with the phase velocity This
strange result
is
we have, according
>
dt
to (83),
(HO)
76
VII,
211
fAbr
we
ikJk
get
(111)
which is i/c times the mechanical work on the substance per unit time
and volume Thus, in *S' we have an exchange of energy between the
electromagnetic and the mechanical system, e a local absorption and
re-emission of light energy by the body This clearly shows that Minkowski's decomposition of the total energy-momentum tensor into an
electromagnetic and a mechanical part is more natural than Abraham's,
a transparent body being in M in ko \vski\s theory a system which does
i
The laws
77.
of
thermodynamics
may
Einstein;].,
in stationary
field.
matter
be easily incoiporated
in
any sin face element In the rest system of the fluid the two laws
thermodynamics may be stated in the usual way
According to the first law the total energy of the system is a unique
function of its state In a thermodynamical process which gives rise to a
only on
of
change of
state, the
Q
change in energy d K
dE Q
--
is
given by
S^-fS/n
(112)
while
8.4
is
the
is
the mechanical
-p Q dV \
(
(113)
542 (1907),
Ann
d.
Fliyt
WienBer
}
Einstein, Jafnb f
(1907)
76,
(1908),
Hasonohrl,
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
212
of
VII,
is
defined
77
by
78.
is
Transformation properties
of the
thermodynamical quan-
tities
We
shall
now
(VI
and
100)
(II
_ w va)
,-J/l --,r->
Jfl-</r,<l
'
(|ig)
Now
dK
8Q + &A,
(117)
where &Q and 8^4 are respectively the heat How through the boundary
and the work done by the surroundings on the system by the process
considered. This work is, however, not simply equal to
p dV, as it was
system. In order to preserve the equilibrium of the substance,
a constant velocity throughout the body, we must assume the existence of external forces besides the normal pressure The total extra force
in the body, which is necessary to keep up a constant u in *S\ is
in the rest
i.e
...
^=
at
c2
*(K+iM">),
\!(\~~u*/c
dt
(118)
from zero during the thermodynamical process considered, there must be an external force on the
and, since the right-hand side
is
different
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
78
213
with
-^-/M/r+u.r/G,
From (1 17),
(119)
(1 19),
and ( 116) we
SQ
=-=
dE +pdV-u.dG
^ dE
(u*/c*) d(
P ^)~(u*/c*)(d^
2
^!(i-~n
(dE-)rp
dV )^(lu
Q
/c
SQ
/c
=~-
(120)
).
(113),
SQ *J(l~u 2 /c
(121)
).
through the boundary is identical with the formula (IV. 66) lor the nonmechanical energy produced inside a body, for instance in the case ot
the Joule heating effect
Further, we define the entropy and absolute temperature in any system
of coordinates by the equation
dS
= 8Q-.
(122)
Thus, for any reversible process without heat transfer, the entropy is
constant. Consider now a thermodynamical system in some internal
state originally at rest in a definite system of coordinates. If this system
accelerated reversibly and adiabatically to the velocity u without
is
any change in its internal state, the entropy must be constant during
the process on account of (122). Thus the entropy of the system is
independent of the velocity when the internal state is the same, which
(cf.
in
every system of
141),
,S'^,S">.
From
(122), (121),
and
(123)
we then
i.e.
is
an
(123)
T-
T<V(l-~tt A
l2
)
in every
124 )
system of co-
dS
>
6n
.
(125)
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
214
79.
of
the
VII,
79
laws of thermo-
69
it
PiT
-'
" 26)
dimensional language, f
Since the entropy is an additive quantity we can introduce the
s 8V is the entropy content of
entropy density s defined so that 8$
the volume element 8V. From (123) and the last equation (116) we get
for the
time
8t
" 27)
>,
where 8Q
d(s
is
8V) /dt is
(128)
we
8t
Here,
get by means
=
g+(grad)
SU
(div(
We
can
now
S+S divu
(129)
~)sr.
(130)
by analogy with
f
C.
Tolman,
(V. 9).
Rclatn'ity, Thcrmotli/ttamiif
and Cosmology,
71,
Oxford 1934.
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
79
By means
of (129) and (130) the left-hand side of (128) takes the form
'SKSJ
-*8S,
8r8,r 4 /i
Si]
is
(132)
3x l
d,r t
where
215
(IV. 121)
and
,,
*>
^ nQ
(133 >
monatomic gases
For a monatomic gas consisting of N molecules we have in the rest
system the usual expressions for the energy, entropy, etc., at least for
moderate temperatures, where the mean kinetic energy of the molecules
2
is small compared with the rest
energy m c of a molecule. Thus if
80. Ideal
m
we have
in the rest
where k
is
(134)
1,
#0
- Nn^+lNkT*,
EQ is equal
(136)
to the
sum
of
and by integration
|A Hn T"+Nkln F
T
+ C,
(138)
e.
(139)
P V = NkT,
the equation of state of an ideal gas is invariant in form. Further,
O ___
M
(140)
fi
*NklnT+NklnV-tNlslnJ(l-'U*lc*) + C
NON-CLOSED SYSTEMS
216
is
80
VII,
(141)
where n
v?kT
(142)^
(
-^~+pl"/c'-
81.
is
where
is
7-6237
of the enclosure.
The radiation
P
=a
is
(144)
l^
= -= Mi/r1
7/
-
<
I45 >
iV Q
By
integration
we
get
*aFT
*
.
(147)
(148)
.Q
_
""
4
*
/7F773
QV
(149)
VII,
ELECTRODYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS
81
The
relation
symmetric
between G, E,
electrostatic
system
and u
is
217
(cf. (23)).
for
black-body radiation
is
**
again
(
150 >
with the relation (145) between the pressure and the density of the
It satisfies the same relation
rest mass.
'.
VIII
The general
principle of relativity
ACCORDING
completely equivalent as regards our description of nature. Mathematically this principle found its expression in the covariance of the
fundamental equations of physics under Lorentz transformations In
spite of the inner consistency
theory of relativity,
it is,
moving
clock,
is
However,
it
seems to be rather
difficult
beforehand to acknowledge
following chapters,
always have
in
we speak
On
if
we wish
to describe the
of inertia.
82
VIII,
It
was
219
of
new
and accelerated systems he considered both kinds of systems of reference to be completely equivalent as regards the form of the fundamental equations and the 'fictitious forces were treated as real forces on
'
the same footing as any other force of nature. The reason for the occurrence in accelerated systems of reference of such peculiar forces should,
according to this new idea, be sought in the circumstance that the distant
masses of the fixed stars are accelerated relative to these systems of
reference. The 'fictitious forces' are thus treated as a kind of gravitational force, the acceleration of the distant masses causing a 'field of
gravitation' in the system of reference considered.
the magnetic
is
in the state of
motion of
terrestrial
systems (viz. that of the charges), while the origin of the gravitational
fields in accelerated systems must be sought in the state of motion of the
distant celestial masses.
Einstein, Jahrb f.
Rad und EL
ZS
4, 411 (1907),
14, 1249 (1913)
Ann
d.
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
220
VIII,
82
when we
is it
not
systems of reference.
It can, however, be
assumed
ence are equivalent with respect to the formulation of the fundamental laws
of physics. This is the so-called general principle of relativity.
The
83.
principle of equivalence
particles
It is
make the statement that all bodies 'are falling with equal speed' in empty
space. This result simply expresses the fact that the force with which the
gravitational field of the earth affects a particle is proportional to the
inertial
mass of the
particle
is
therefore given
mx
by the equation
wg,
where m is the mass of the particle and x is the acceleration of the particle
The quantity g is a measure
and
is
mass
is
interest
v Eotvos, Math u nalurw Ber aua Ungarn, 8, 65 (1890), Ann. d Phys. 59,
Southerns, I' roc ftoi/ tfor London, A, 84, 325 (1910); P. Zeeman, Proc.
Amst 20, 542 (1917) H. v Eotvos, D. PekAr, and E. Fekote, Ann. d Phys 68, 11
f
354
181)6), L.
(1922).
VIII,
83
221
defect.
from
'close'
magnetic field have the same constant velocity relative to the fixed stars,
it is possible completely to transform away the
magnetic field by choosing
the rest system of the charges as system of reference, for in this system
the field will be a purely electrostatic field. In general it will, however,
not be possible to choose a system of reference in which the magnetic
disappears everywhere in this system. Nevertheless, in this case
the electromagnetic field is not considered as essentially different from
the field of a system where the magnetic field can be transformed away.
field
In
all
tions, viz.
Maxwell's equations.
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
222
VIII,
83
The most important task will now be to look for the general fundamental laws which all types of gravitational fields must obey. In the
first place, we must, however, try to find the field functions which can
give an adequate description of the fields of gravitation. To this end we
shall first consider the simple case where no permanent gravitational
fields are present. By a suitable choice of the system of reference, viz.
in a system of inertia, the field of gravitation will disappear and we can
apply the laws of the special theory in this system A simple transforma-
84,
of coordinates.
conceptions of space and time than that required by the special principle
of relativity To illustrate the character of the problems with which we
.
we
masses that
Z,
all
shall start
',
16
and
17.
as well
-^
Rcose,
y=-j?sin0.
Now we
rcos#,
y =- rsin#
(i)
S
(2)
(3)
cu.
For
84
VIII,
Thus
223
-R<
c/aj
(4)
of the radius
The
measuring-rods are made, and all such deformations of the measuringrod can therefore easily be corrected for. Now we make the assumption
that measuring-rods on the disk, after insertion of these corrections, have
same length relative to I as the standard measuring-rod in the
exactly the
system of inertia 7 which at the moment considered has the same velocity
as the measuring -rod on the rotating disk. In general, we shall assume
that the (corrected) standard measuring -rods in an accelerated system relative
to the
means
to
relative to 7.
we
the value
-,
dcr
-,
dr;
,-\
(5)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
224
On
VIII,
84
we
consider two points with the coordinates (r,&) and (r,&+d&) on the disk, a measuring-rod connecting
these two points will have the velocity ra> relative to / in its own direction
contraction.
and
it
will therefore
if
we
get similarly
According to
27T
rd&
o
Therefore the ratio of the length of the periphery to the radius will not
be 27T, but
2
forces us in
particularly advocated
tivity, was regarded as
by Kant and even in the special theory of relaan indispensable foundation of all description of
(cf.
87) that
it is
not possible in
THE
84
VIII,
CSKNT ERAL
THEORY OF RELATIVITY
225
renewed
by putting them to zero at the moments when the clocks in / with which
they coincide show zero. Then we have for the time t thus defined in the
for T
0. A standard clock at the point r, # on
rotating system t =
the disk has, however, a velocity TOJ relative to /, and therefore it will
be retarded relative to the clocks in / in agreement with equation
e at a later time we have
(II. 36),
TV(l-r
o; /c
(9)
).
20,
it is
/, will influence
a standard clock
dropped on the floor), but such an effect which depends on the material of
which the clock is made can be corrected for, just as was the case
with the measuring-rods.
The description of time in the rotating system which we obtain by
using the time variable t defined by (9) is, however, although admissible
in principle, highly unpractical. Imagine, for instance, a light source
placed at the point A with coordinates (r, #) and which
The number of waves emitted
emits light with the proper frequency v
1 is then
to t
in the time-interval from t
by definition equal to v
(an atom) which
is
1 is
to T
The number of waves emitted during the time from T
2
2
2
of
waves
number
The
same
to
v
r
co
therefore, according
(l
(9),
/c )*.
T=
=
to
to
T=
or, since
1.
The number of
light
(r
=T
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
226
84
VIII,
it
is (1
r 2o> 2 /c 2 )~*
ordinate clocks
is
formation
t
instead of
T in
7, i.e.
we have
the trans-
(10)
(9).
In principle
it is
arbitrary rate, provided that the time variable t defined by these coordinate clocks gives a reasonable chronological ordering of the physical
events. In accelerated systems of reference the spatial and temporal
85.
disk
is
non-
Euclidean. Although
all
physical space is
geometry, the notion of non- Euclidean geometry in two dimensions is
by no means foreign to us, since we meet examples, of such geometries
we shall therefore
where F, G
- F(x\x^
* - H(x\x*)>
y - 6V,*
H are given functions of the two parameters x
certain intervals.
(11)
),
differentiation of (11)
By
,
dx
dF
'dF
-ax
,
dx l -\
dx
we
and x 2
in
obtain
^dx*
(11')
dz
&H
1
dH
--
dx l -\
^
.
VIII,
85
227
iven b ^
ds 2
dx 2 +dy 2 +dz 2
2
l
dx, dy, dz are linear expressions in dx and dx given by (11').
2
Using these expressions we therefore get ds expressed as a homo1
2
geneous quadratic form in dx and dx i.e.
where
ds
=g
ll
(12)
with
3F 3F
dG 8G
dH dH
(12
meters
(x ,x
2
)
is
SsAs
where (So:, Sz/, 8z) and (A#, A?/, Az) are the increments in x, y, z obtained
from (IT) by replacing dx = (dx l ,dx 2 by (8x ) and (Aa: 1 ), respectively,
85 and As being the lengths of the line elements. Applying (11'), (12),
and (12') this equation can be written in the form
1
cos
The
line
i*
l1
elements (8x l )
2i
(Sx ,Sx
2
)
,8
and (As 1
(Ao;
da
where
(14')
given by (14).
The curves on the surface which are obtained from
is
(11)
by putting
constant,
(15 a)
constant,
(156)
(&**)
(cfeSO)
and
(A**)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
228
(12)
and
^=
VIII,
85
(14)
ten)*
^>
AS
(022)*
dx*
7--77,
(011022)*
where
011
012
021
022
is
da=
For the
l
<Igdx dx*.
(17)
general curvilinear coordinates (Gaussian coordinates) on the twoAll the fundamental geometrical quantities can
then be expressed in terms of these coordinates alone without reference
dimensional surface.
ordinates
(r'),
summation over
The angle
by (14)
2 _-=
line
(18)
and
elements ($x
___^
ox LX k
o,'Sx^x
y
tA
.
cosS 6
(12),
K
g lk dx*dx
'
given by
-*
and k
expression.
is
and
(Ao;
is
given
,
and the area of the parallelogram defined by two line elements in the
directions of the coordinate curves is given by (17). The quantities g lk
the components of the so-called metric tensor thus determine the
geometry on the surface which in general will be non-Euclidean.
86.
Geodesic lines
The
curves of shortest distance are in the more general case replaced by the
geodesic lines which likewise may be defined by a variational principle.
86
VIII,
Or
,:*:
may
229
be regarded as certain
xl
i.e.
Let
L(x'
(20)
a^A)
A2
(i
(20)
1,2).
and
xl
The curve
<A<
dx l /d\.
L(x ,&)d\
A\
L(x\x')d\
----=
(21)
At
boundary condition
So^Aj) ==
Now we
So; (A 2 )
0.
(22)
have
A2
A2
L dX
Jg
8^(A)
+ g 8^(A)
^/A,
(23)
AI
AI
l
last
This integral can only be zero for all imaginable variations Saf(A) if the
factor in the square brackets is zero along the whole curve. The variational principle (21), (22)
is
equations
(24)
(
;
If
have
is
we
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
230
and for ft
1 it is
(25)
we
dL
must be constant
equations (24). From (24) and
86
VIII,
l
L(x x
get
___
dL
3L
.,
/yl
/yt
___
d ldL\
I
.,
>>*
,
I
dL dxl
d IdL
__
fy't
\
I
tn
dL
(26)
Hence
If
-=f=-
1)^ = 0.
(n
1
is
(27)
d\
that
l
)
constant
(28)
(24).
Now we define the geodesic lines by the variational principle (21) with
(29)
d'l
(24) are
1
dda* dx>
(
'
which represent two differential equations of second order for the two
l
functions # l'(A). Since Lin (29) is homogeneous of the second degree in x
,
-=
constant
an integral of
(30),
dl
ds
It
is
now
_
-
gtk
\
"d)
ki
~8x>
~fate'
gik
Us ds
'
seen at once that the curves defined by (30) and (31) also
^ *r
lines also satisfy the variational
equation
the distance between two points measured along the geodesic line
connecting two arbitrary points has a stationary value.
i.e.
VIII,
86
231
lines, etc.,
dimensional space
is
on the surface,
completely defined
i.e.
l
by the quantities g lk (x ).
87.
coordinates x'
formation
we have
dx
f
'
c\r
i.e.
r/A
(35)
Therefore
where the
coefficients
ordinates x'
=g
g\ k
dx dx k
l
lk
~-
dx' dx' k
l
g\ k
(36)
new
co-
Since the geodesic lines are defined by the invariant variational principle (21), (29), it is obvious that the differential equations for the
(30) or
(32)
(dX
l
)
+(dX*)
= S dX dX k
l
lk
(37)
the geometry on the surface is called Euclidean. In this case the co1
play the same part as do Cartesian coordinates in a
ordinates
Euclidean plane. The differential equations (32) for the geodesic lines
reduce in these coordinates to the equations
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
232
87
VIII,
coordinates.
all
such surfaces
may be
regarded as identical.
In general it is not possible to introduce on the surface such coordinates (Cartesian coordinates) for which the line element assumes the form
(37). In this case the geometry on the surface is a non-Euclidean general
case it is possible by means of measurements on the surface to determine the geometry on the surface without
referring to the three-dimensional Euclidean space m which the surface
is embedded.
Let us assume that we have introduced an arbitrary
of
coordinates, a' i e. an arbitrary continuous one-to-one corresystem
spondence of the set of numbeis (x and the points on the surface. By
means of a measuring-rod we can now measure the distance ds between
the points x and x l -\-dx Since then ds and dx are known numbers, the
?
done for any point on the surface, thus obtaining a complete experimental determination of the metric tensor
In this way the geometry on the surface becomes an empirical science
subjected to the limitations arising from the limited measuring accuracy
Now imagine that we heat the surroundings of a gi von point on the surface
so that the measuring-rods are dilated
neglect this dilatation we shall, by
we
above, find wrong values for the components of the metric tensors.
Since, however, the thermal dilatation is different for measuring-rods
prepared from various materials, it is easy to correct for this error and to
find the 'real' values for the
tensor.
On
the
no well-defined meaning in the statement that such an expansion of the standard rods has taken place, and
correct for
it.
Therefore there
is
VIII,
&
87
233
from a physicist's point of view the metric tensor and the geometry
obtained by measurements with the natural standard rods must be the
'real' geometry on the surface.
All the considerations of this
now be immediately
can
The only
difference
is
characterized
by
(18)
and
n equations
equations
(19), respectively,
(30) or
line
all
1
to n.
and the'geodesic
88.
In
84
we have
system of reference
as
),
Let us start again from a system of inertia / with the usual space and
time coordinates (X, Y, Z, T) To each set of values of these variables
corresponds a certain event which is represented by a point in (3+1)space with coordinates
X =
1
These coordinates
that
differ
(X,Y,Z,cT).
= dX +dY*+dZ
2
where
Otk
(39)
-c* dT*
- Glk dX>dX k
for
== k =- 1,2, 3
4.
for
l
general 'curvilinear' coordinates x in four-space
formations
/
l
,VL-\
k
x l (X
),
t
(40)
=k=
only in
The four-dimen-
form
for
in (IV. 2)
(41)
THE FOUiNDATlOJNS Ob
234
where the xl
Xk
the variables (X
a special case of
The transformations
).
(42).
By
1 ), (3),
dX*
Using
i-iri*
= ~~
dxk
88
we obtain
n^rl*
(d.^
we obtain
&
differentiation of (42)
3~.i
U*'
From
Vlll,
Afc
dx k
in the
same way
(44)
A}& k dxk
l
dx l
Since this equation
is
we must have
=
*"^
for
A} A'A
Elimination of
dX
d8*
=-
in
(44),
we obtain the
(45')
Sj^
interval:
ffi*
(45,
k.
flu
0, m
g lk dx*<h*
^ Ar ^ A
(46)
A k~ ^ A
(47)
ing system of reference can be pictured by a real fluid. This means that
the velocities of the points of reference relative to the system of inertia /
we
to/>
c.
dX'
Aj
(48)
VIII,
88
If this velocity
is
to be smaller than
V
= ~T
<
\
c
c
we must have
A4 A 4
or
c,
235
Aj Aj
<
0.
(49)
<
0-
(50)
signal.
ds 2
=g
lk
dx l dxk
0.
In other words, any two events which are simultaneous in the system
of coordinates (xl ), i.e. for which dx*
0, cannot be connected by a
so
that
in
must
have
this
case
we
signal,
k
g lk dx*dx
or, since
dx*
l
K
g lK dx dx
0,
>
>
0,
0.
(51)
now
quadratic form g lK
sufficient condition for this to be true
is
that
all
subdeterminants of
0u
<7
>0,
9"
9iK
t/Ki
VKK
in
U ).
013
0,
031
where
012
032
<? 44
<
0,
(52)
033
1, 2,
3 (no
summation over
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
236
From
determinant
012
013
014
022
023
024
031
032
033
034
041
042
043
044
011
=
If
I0,*l
88
VIII,
<
0.
of coordinates x' 1
(53)
by means of the
transformation equations
x' 1
t'
dxl
x' l (x k )
aju
dx k -=
k
&[ dx'
dx k
dx k
(54)
fa*
dx' k
(45), (45'),
= k dx' dx' k
- glm &[
ds 2 =- g lk dx dx k
l
where
are
new
g lk
again be a homo-
g\
(56)
cx
g'kl
^=
(57)are
will
0; n
x'
1
.
The
(57)
relations reciprocal to
xr,
(58)
which can easily be verified by substituting from (57) in the rightside of (58) and using (55). The transformations (54) must be such
that the new functions g'lk again satisfy inequalities of the form (52).
hand
Tn general the system of reference R' defined by the system of coordinates (x/ ) will be different from the system of reference R corresponding to the coordinates (x ), but if the transformations (54) are of
1
the form
x
x'*
= x(x]
= x'*(x*) = /(a*)
x' 1 are
(59)
and
and
(x
infinite
number of
88
VIII,
237
(59).
will
89.
all
have a vanishing
field.
have introduced a certain system of coordinates (x ). Consider in particular two points of reference A and B in this system with the space
coordinates (x ) and (x -}~dx ), respectively The spatial distance da
between A and B at the time /
JT*/C can now be measured by means of a
standard measuring-rod connecting the points A and B and at rest
In the limit of very small dx B will also be practically
relative to A
at it\st relative to the measuring-rod In order to express da in terms of
the functions g lk we introduce the system of inertia 7 relative to which
l
----
t.
The
differences
dX
between simultaneous
~-
Hence
and
dX
dx*
dt
= A K dx.
B at the time of
0.
(61)
dx*
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
238
89
VIII,
dX we
da 2
see that
(61) for
is
a quadratic form
i.e.
= y dx'dx"
y = A* A*.
da 2
with
(62)
lK
lK
Now we
and
^-
4
A
A,_
Hence
(60)
EE
g '4
~~J^
\A
t,
g lK ~\-A l
(63)
&
AK
which leads to the following expressions for the spatial metric tensor
YlK
QlK
+ YlYK:
spatial
64 )
geometry in the
0*=0
or
0.
(65)
Now
C inserted
since
by
is
dx
for
a clock at
rest.
44
(dx*)
While
(66)
x*/c
given by
^=_
c,
VIII,
89
37).
(cf.
if
239
we introduce
^ _ _^
becomes
ds*
since
dX Ql =
(d?70)2
0.
7, we have
clocks at rest in
dT
drl
dr
-<7 44
TQ
given by standard
can be written
itself is
and
(66)
dt*.
(66')
C and the coordinate clock at the place con44 may thus be obtained experimentally by
method
To determine the
87.
we simply need
six
independent components y lK
measure the lengths of six properly chosen hne elements (dx
to
at each
t ,
characterized
by the equation
ds*
for in the
=g
lk
dx l dx k
0,
(67)
is c,
which
The equation
=O
lk
(67)
may
g iK
or,
by means of
dXidX*
dX*+dY*+dZ*-c* dT*
If
we
divide this
0.
also be written
dx'dx+2g t dx^dx^+g^
L
(63), (64),
and
(dx*)*
dx-)+^(-g^} 7l dx^dx^+g^
2
equation by dt we obtain
w*
0,
(62),
da*-(<y dx^(y K
L
{yt
^_cV(-<744)}
(dx*)*
0.
2
,
(68)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
240
where the
dx
-
wn
89
VIII,
(69)
at
m the direction
n and
l
w=
= V(y^'^)
Tt
(69')
the magnitude of this velocity. In the first place, we see from (68) that
w depends on the direction of propagation n of the
is
signal
In
fact,
in the
we
where
ylK nlnK
if
get
*>
1
-
(yt^
<
(70)
(y L n
with respect to
),
determine
possible in principle to
The
90.
spatial
geometry
>
all
</ 44
i.e.
by experiments.
in the rotating
system of reference
X=
rcos(#+o>Z),
Z^z,
By
differentiation
Y=
T=
rsm(&+cot)
t
(71)
we
get
ds 2
= dr*+r
Thus we have
^ +d2 +2cur
2
d&dt-(c*-rW)
dt*
=g
lk
dxl dx k
(72)
VIII,
90
241
all
yt
=
=
y lK
OJ
for
~
2
r2
|0,
(64),
8 l2
(74)
-^ K
j/ 44
(9).
K
y lK dx dx
l
is
0, i.e.
da l
da da
2 dx l
dx dx K
l
They
In our case
and by integration
1
where a
is
r
rz
ST^#
w 2 /c z
(76 a)
>
Hence,
d&jdv.
- --
fl-rW/c*\
Oil
(7e
,,
'
1'
'
r2
dr
TT
Hence,
TO
r
-*
"
i-^^-S
r as a
*
\
_
T-?V
r2
->
/77
7T
(
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
242
is
zero,
90
VIII,
= 0,
In Fig. 17
i.e.
the
we have
(r,
#).
The curves
FIG 17
in this picture are therefore simply the curves in the fixed JfF-plane
with which the points on the geodesies of the rotating disk coincide at
T
0. The radius r* of the disk is defined by (4), i.e.
the time t
r*
sponds to an a
(78)
c/co.
OB and OA we have a =
(/*
0) at right angles to
0.
OA,
with
0, corre-
_
(
-r
_
~
__
r
__
a>'c)
a 2 )*
r(r
-
air
is
(80)
if
a:i(or 1 ),
OB
xfa
90
VIII,
243
cos 6
= >W di
^-=
Ct)
1C
n~'" Z
-=*.}
'-
r2
(81)
where
c^
and
two geodesies
A B at A
is
<
thus,
A = \7T.
Finally, we get the angle 6 B between the geodesies
i.e.
(81)
by putting
0,
a2
i.e.
TT.
-a, r
r*
in the triangle
c/a>.
BA and BO from
Thus we get
OAB is
the
approximately equal to the Euclidean value TT. There are even triangles
on the rotating disk for which the sum of the angles is zero. If, for in-
stance,
QCBD
Thus the sum of the angles in a triangle on the rotating disk can have all
values between
and ir. The spatial geometry as determined by observers on the rotating disk is the same as on a surface of negative
curvature in a three-dimensional Euclidean space.
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
244
90
VIII,
Sometimes
(x,y,z) in
rcos#,
r2
rsm&,
x 2 -{-y 2
(82)
91.
of free particles
and
/l-^c ^
2
(83)
light rays
Cartesian coordinates
started in
i.e. its
time track
is
(X
where A
is
freely falling particle is a geodesic in 4-space. The geodesies are defined by the variational principle (21), (29), (33), where the indices &, k
now
--
dr
must be
zero for
all
dr
(85)>
(
2 dx* dr dr
r1
and T
r2
d( 9lk dx
dr\
dx*dtf
\_ldg
2^-fo dr*
~&r)
dtfdx*
kl
9lk
^^ _
~~
'
b)
Glk
= Glk dX dX k =
l
0.
91
VIII,
245
Instead of (86)
dx k \
dt
__
dtif* d\)
k
l
dg kl dx dx
2W
where
rfA
==
xl
dA
a;
~
__
'
~d\~dX
(A)
may
92.
dxl dx*
9lk
'
The dynamical
gravitational potentials
89 and 90
In
defined by (64). We shall now determine the quantities which describe the
dynamical action of the gravitational fields. For this purpose we shall
use a test body of arbitrary mass, which is placed at rest at the point
of our system of reference at which we wish to measure the gravitational
field. The acceleration imparted to this particle by the gravitational
field
From
'
= =
*
(86)
we
1. 2, 3.
d *x*
which
field.
is
dx*\
momentarily at
rest,
taking
dgjdx'
(88)
Further,
motion
c2
where
is
dr 2
ds 2
(63),
and
L
K
g lH dx dx +2g^ dx
dx*+g^
(dx*)
Dividing (89) by
gives
dx*
~dr
(dx*)
-c
(-M
v u'
:^Vl)
<v(
044);
- U2/C2 }-*
\
J
'
(90)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
246
is
92
da
where
VIII,
~Ji
at
Hence
and
g^
for a particle
= cy
which
is
,~
momentarily at
^ 2 /c 2{744
-f-
rest
we
>
get after
some
cal-
and
Using (91) and
(90) in (88)
we thus obtain
inn\
(92)
i
-
The
If
we
field is
we put
44
= ~^dx
/i
+
!
AJ \
+ -c
(94)
}^-
(95)
/ dt
tional scalar
<jr
is
simply
at
=-
3
.
(96)
This
92
VIII,
is,
sidered in
90,
and from
and
(73)
= -r
we
(94)
co
247
(97)
force.
93.
by the
potentials (y t x)
,
Since r
is
is
time-orthogonal,
system considered. If
= and
we have y
(99)
The formulae (98) and (99) are the generalizations of the formula (II. 38)
and express the retardation (or advancement) of moving clocks in the
case where gravitational fields are present.
For a clock at rest in our system of reference
we have
(100)
in accordance
clock
On
is
situated;
it is
dr
+ 2x/c a
d^/(l
(101)
dtj(l-r*a>*/c*),
a standard clock far from the Centre has a slower rate than a standard
T. This
clock placed at the centre which simply shows the time t
i.e.
>
An
to the formula
drQ
dt<J(
u*/c*)
-=
dt<J(
rW/c
2
).
02)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
248
On
field
(102).
^r
An
o>
2
,
and
observer in
of the gravitational
94.
the velocity u
93
will
field
Transformation
0,
VIII,
system
of
reference
Let
(59) simply introduces a new numbering of the reference points in R together with an arbitrary change in rate and setting
of the coordinate clocks This, of course, cannot give rise to any change
The transformation
in the spatial
by the transformation
Appendix 4.
(59).
in
defined
(57).
and
by
(94)
In the
x''
1
;
z' 4
x'*(x*)
= f(x*)
(103)
We
need
to ensure that the scalar potential in the system (x' 1 ) vanishes.
the
new
coordinate
so
that
time
variable
t'
the
new
choose
x'*/c
only
and
same rate
(100), this is
On account of (66')
obtained by putting
t
V(-
(104)
94
VIII,
also in the
249
new system,
dt'
=--
dr
dt'
III
V
i.e.
x'
=
+ -*-)
c
dt'J(-<fu ),
fik=-l.
0,
(105)
time-orthogonal and
all
Let us
0.
(106)
Since the interval can be written in the form (89) in every system of
2
coordinates, and since da is invariant under the transformations (103),
we must have
^.'4
must be the
!/p^ _
4
rt
(107)
Thus we
see
that the space-time derivatives of the function /must have the following
ratios
j-f
This
is
J^ J
?i_
__
-2^?
73 __
__!
QAON
'
for
i=l,2,3.
V
(109)
;
These conditions could also be obtained from (106) by mep,ns of the transformation properties of the gravitational potentials (see Appendix 4).
Now the simultaneous differential equations (109) have a solution
only when the following compatibility conditions are
multiply (109) by the operator
in this
satisfied.
If
we
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
250
and K interchanged,
the quantity
we
VIII,
94
1-
must be
zero,
o> tAC
i.e.
(HI)
for all values of t and K. (Ill) together with (110) represent the general
condition which the dynamical gravitational potentials must satisfy in
order that the vector potential may be made to vanish by a transforma-
components of
o> tK
are
aj l2
o> 21
r^_-_,
(112)
>
all
components of g lk
i.e.
If simultaneously
y LKJ
#,
and y
we can obtain
95.
Let
X =
1
(X,Y, Z,cT) again be pseudo- Cartesian space-time coordinates in a system of inertia /. The Galilean transformation (I. 2)
y
b
-*\.
7
wT
V
J.
it
)
if
JL
A>
7i
J,
f
I
JL
n 1 *U
\LlOf
X
=
95
VIII,
same
ds*
i.e.
all
If
v.
velocity
02 2
we put
(x
k
g lk dx*dx
g 83
251
= Oik d
U
1,
==
41
v/c,
44
-(l-i>
form
and from
and
(63), (64),
(94)
we
for
V33
/c
(a;*) is
),
there-
get
new
coordinates X' 1
X'
(59)
(X \
Y',
Y'
'-
Z',cT
by
*Z'
11
(116)
r
we
A-
et
are
(x
defined
(x, y, z, ct)
by the transformation
X=
x+\gt*,
y,
T=
z,
t.
(118)
ds*
dx 2 +dy*+dz*+2gt dxdt-c*
dt*(l
-^1
i.e.
all
ffu
= fe = 033 =
!>
(7l4
= 041 = ^/C,
044
c2 /
1
f
""
(119)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
252
VIII,
95
Hence,
Yi
fl*_
-.0,0),
=-
V
(120)
733
^ r
<
<
The space geometry in this system is defined by the spatial line element
da 2
It
y lK
Jr 2
dx<<dx
-J-
+ dif+dz
(121)
g*t*/c*
is
ing-rods in the moving system Since the potentials do not depend on the
space coordinates the quantities w lK in (110) are zero, which means that
the
i.e. if
ds 2
is
we
get
</44
=-
12^2
J
'
=~
e 2gXIc*
in^yaZTa
y
'
(123)
^9/
/
It
new coordinates
is
easily verified
'
by
'
1 \
'
is
identical with
is
non-
is
geometry
time-dependent,
the distance between two neighbouring reference points depends
on the variable t. This is also evident, since the measuring-rods in the
i.e.
will
reference
is
rigid
/,
an observer in
the accelerated system itself will find that the system of reference points
is dilated in the direction of the #-axis,
95
VIII,
253
For small values of t and x, i.e. if we retain only terms of the first order
in gt/c and gx/c z we get t - t(l-gx/c*), g^ = -(l+2gx'/c*) x = 9*',
and from (96)
o
a
(124)
'
'=-0i=<-0>')'
i.e.
96. Rigid
is
origin
between two
refer-
the coordinates X^
by the equations
(X,Y>Z,icT).
Its
time track
may
^ =/,(*),
be described
(1^5)
T being the proper time of the particle. We shall now try to introduce
a system of coordinates (x )
(x, y, 2, rt) which is the relativistic analogue
l
46
momentary
rest
Now
in (IV. 140),
in the
we
system
by putting
0,
(126)
(x
at the time
X
where the
=/&)+**(*)>
127 )
These equations
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
254
which
lies
by means of
dXi
we
If
VIII,
96
(IV. 136),
= [AW+a^W] dt+dx*Kl
(t)\
(128)
we
get,
on account
of (IV. 138),
ds 2
where
= dX dX = dx*-\-dy
= (x^ct) = (x,y z,ct)
=* U=
gK = gK
l
(t)
Kl
* Kl f
30)
particle in its
da 2
dx*+dy*+dz
(131)
Thus the space geometry is even Euclidean and (x, y, z) are Cartesian
space coordinates. The vector potential is zero and for the scalar
potential we get
(132)
Hence,
in
2
--gradx - _g(i + (g. x )/c ).
a region around the origin, where
(133)
(a.xKc,
the gravitational field
g(<)
At the origin x
is
dr0== ^(l
a standard clock.
we have TO =
t,
+ (g.x)/C
i.e.
2
).
It
96
VIII,
may
255
97, Rigid
frames
of reference
moving
X-axis
the origin O of the system (x ) is moving in the direction of the
Jf-axis of the system (XJ, the coefficients a lk are given by (IV. 154, 147),
and the transformation equations (127) reduce to the equations
When
X=
(135)
smhB(t)
J
o
which are
also obtained
we
get,
g-
For
(126).
d
(0,0,0),
g(t)^c /->
(136)
at
This
is
by
differentiation of (135)
and
In particular,
if
i.e.
g(t)
at
g,
is
c 2 /<7,
we have, according
=g=
to (IV. 159),
constant
field is static,
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
256
X=
97
to
- l\ + x cosh g-
- (cosh ge
g\
Y =
VIII,
(140)
y,
9
as seen
By
in (140)
we
get
X = {[(l+^)+^W-J}|
?
Z
Y~y,
Thus we
for x,
?/,
-- x, Y
z at T
?/, Z
starting at the point
The acceleration in tlus hyperbolic motion is
29),
on account of
dX
dT
at the
time
[(!-)
yx/c
n
|n
(143)
,gt
tanh
.
2
\
is
2 2
)
(142)
yx/c
gT
-
f/
1 -f
(see
0,
(/
-,
T 2 /c 2 Y-
c.
(140).
an observer
in
is
__
(143).
7
__
"
//,
V(
-,2/ r 2\ ,/ r
'
C08h"to//C)^
(144)
where v
is
For small values of / and x, where w e can neglect terms m gx/c 2 and
gt/c of higher than first order, the system of reference R considered here
is identical with the
system considered at the end of 95.
r
97
VIII,
257
now
Let us
(86)
d x
/,
CiT
1, 2,
3 (86)
becomes
gx\
C
(dt\
\dT/
_~
__
From
dr
-u 2 lc
2 2
dt^[(l+gx/c
where
(146)
],
dx
dt
is
(86).
Using
means of
2g/c
dt 2
[dx\
l-{-gxlc \dt)
*
easily verified
The
^
is
by
r
X
as
get
(146)
d 2x
The
we
XQ,
dx
-=
\J
-,
1U1
__
M48\
1* /
V
\J
= ?f( + ? ^-ir-l'L
1
by
differentiation
and substitution
dx
<
149 )
in (147).
is
di + 03D
I
dt
&
dt
c*
amax
/c
_ c(l+gx
S
maximum
2
)
'
and decreases again to zero for t-+oo. If x > c 2 /g, the velocity of the
particle assumes values which are larger than c; however, u is always
smaller than the velocity of light, which is
w=
on account of
3596.60
(70)
and
c(l+gx/c
(137).
2
)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
258
For
system
VIII,
97
zero,
and no
time
^o)
__<?!_
c*) ) coshV/c
/5
+ ?o]tanh?-'.
c
\g^
(151)'
V
c)
1
Finally, if the origin of the system (x ) is moving with constant
0, and the vector
velocity v in the direction of the positive X-axis,/,
</ t
defined
by
30)
is
zero.
system of reference
a system of inertia
Ul r,
constant and/
in this case
is
Further, since Ul is
identical with the special Lorentz trans-
v.
is
98.
At the time
*S\
point on
velocity v until
it
it
&"T -
A'7
M.
v.
98
VIII,
259
A Tl
- AT -
2(A'7
+A"T+A'"T)
2(2A"F+A"T).
(152)
Via
Similarly
18
we get
where
(III.47),ic.
*=!
ll
f7lL
/.J1V211
\c
^
*-l,
/ J
(164)
where
and
r/?
is
dX
Hence we get
or
The
velocity
gT
dX/dT
is
thus
(155)
(156)
(157)
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
260
VIII,
of inertia
(II.
r'2
of Cz
98
by means of
Sv Hence
AT
On account
AT
of (157) this
also be written
may
q&T
vie
Slnh
158 )
--
=-
tanh
or
/lr o\
Sinh
(1 58')
way we
get from
(II.
38)
v 2 / c2 )-
Now,
if
we apply a
larger
and
159 )
larger force
the acceleration g
Fjm will also increase. In the limit g -> oo for
tt"T and r'2
constant v we see from (158) that both
r,J tend
to zero. In this limit, where the velocity v is attained nearly instan-
AT =
taneously,
we thus
A Tl
2A 7
Ar 2
i.e.
as
Ar 2
2rl
2&"TJ(l-v*[c
(160)
),
Ar x V(l-^ 2 /c 2 )
(161)
we should have. The moving clock (72 is lagging behind the stationary
Cv
oo,
the
maximum
distance
between
= vAT.
(162)
We shall now see that the same result is obtained if the whole process
treated in a rigid system of reference *S 2 with coordinates (x,y, z, t)
which follows the motion of C*2 in such a way that C2 is permanently
situated at the origin. In the time intervals where S2 is accelerated relative to J&! or to the distant stars, we have a gravitational field in 52
During the time interval < t <. r 2 of magnitude A' = r 2 the gravitais
is
< <
< <
have x
{7^(1
(7#/2c
).
During the
first
period
A'tf
the clock Cj
is
accordance with
VIII,
98
is
261
moving uniformly
it is
brought to rest
1.
between the two clocks is the same when measured in S2 or in Slf After this
moment
the clock
returns to
The
clock
C*2 is
The increase in the proper time of the clock C can now be calculated
by means of the general formula (99) with the expressions for x given
above. In (149), (150), and (151) we have given the solution of the
equations of motion (147). If r\, TJ, and r denote the increase of the
proper time of Cl in the intervals A', A '7, A "7, respectively, we have
l
An =
obviously
2( T ;+rI+TD.
AT,
+ A"H-A'"0 -
2(A'J
(163)
where x
0,
2(2A'H-A"/)
and
= A7 =
r2
we can
A% the clock (7
X is
A"/V(1~W
2
)
on account of
-(/, XQ
rr
1
~->
"
although
may
2
)
A"T(l-v
/c
(166)
r'2
in (151).
= (MtaBh^ =
c
\g^c)
Hence
(MH
\f7
(167)
c/c
(158').
In the limit as g
A'"
r^(l -v*Ic
(159). Finally, r
r
A"7
-/, and t
on account of
(165)
Thus we get
in a field-free space.
-~
get r[ from
(158').
T\
(164)
Hence
on account of
constantly
2(2r'2 -f r 2').
*s
r2
oo with constant v
r 2 ->
is
we
in this limit,
THE FOUNDATIONS OF
262
and
we
oo,
VIII,
98
(159),
Ar
2r
(169)
the same result as in (160). This result which represents the solution
of the clock paradox is, of course, not surprising, since the proper time is
an invariant which has the same value in any system of coordinates.
i.e.
We
now
finally consider
same phenomenon
in
r2
= 7V(l-# to
2
/c
o>
J(l-R*a>*lc*)
(170)
= T=
rl
27T
~".
(171)
CO
Let us now treat the same phenomenon from the point of view of an
observer on the rotating disk of 90. In this system # 2 the clock (72 is at
rest at the point (r
R, & ~~ 0), say, while the clock Cl is rotating with
the angular velocity
'
yn
/
It. (\ is
falling freely under the influence of the
gravitational field with the potentials (74) and (97),
in a circle of radius
(in)
It
is
>
constant, d&/dt
is
a solution of the
clock C2 remains
equations of motion (86) with g tfc given by (73).
at rest, the gravitational acceleration (96) being counter-balanced by the
The
force F.
VIII,
98
263
ZTTJOJ
we now
VU + 2*/c 2 =
r2
CO
CO
Va-r^/c*)
(173)
To determine
we
we
da 2
dx dx
l
Hence, from
TI
(98),
27r
f(V(l---r
aj /c
*****
a
)
*****
j^
27T
-
(174)
Thus, in this case, the effects of the gravitational potentials and of the
velocity of the clock C\ on the proper time r l as expressed in the formula
(98) just cancel
and
for TJ
and
r2
we
get the
same values
as before.
The physical interpretation of the effect is, however, completely different in the two cases Tn S1 the effect is ascribed to the velocity of
the particles only, while in S2 the phenomenon is explained as a joint
effect of the gravitational field and the motion.
IX
ec* uation
(1)
The non-permanent
ds*
-G
lk
dX*dX k
(2)
for
by a suitable choice of the space-time coordinates
or, in other words, the space is a flat pseudo-Euclidean space in this case.
According to the principle of equivalence there should, however, be
all
points in 4-space
y tk
non-permanent fields. The only difference will then be that the permanent fields cannot be removed completely by a suitable transformation of the space-time coordinates, i.e. ds 2 cannot be brought into the
form
is
for
which the
first
derivatives d
lk ldS?
IX,
99
266
permanent
l
i.e.
fields.
for
must now be
"
is
dA dB
B '""''"'
} =0
-
'
where
physical quantities in
(x'
i.e.
The only difference from the case considered in 35 is that now the gravitational quantities g lk will be among the set of physical quantities
A, J5,... entering into the equations (3).
trivial
is
we
shall see,
266
IX,
99
100. Contravariant
of a four -vector
Let
(x
The geometry in
We
==
is
52) at every
shall
negative. Let
012
013
014
031
032
033
034
041
042
043
044
(4)
I0i*l
011
we then
of the theory of
get
summation over
(no
i)
\.
(5)
and
i
g*
we have, according
to
of quantities g tk
by
- d* = / S
(6)
(5),
= ?* = 8?,
=*
f f
8* = (
1
0,/ff*
where
If
for
we
- 4 dx" =
=
(8)
-^ k
x' 1 =- r''(j<?)
'
(7)
a'k dx' k
88 (see equa-
dx"
dx' k
(11)
g\ k
9tk
=
=
&\s$glm
<*(<*kSi m
IX,
100
(10), (12)
^ _ ^ ^^ = ^ ^ w
invariant
267
*.
13)
is
taneously for
all
must
since they
following from the definition of the aj. in (10). This will be possible only
for a flat space, in which case the functions g lk satisfy special conditions
(see
107).
(x
a' 1
On account
==-
4a
fc
(15)
= &k a' k
(15')
Since the coefficients a k and & k are functions of the coordinates (a: ),
the transformation laws (15) and (15') have a definite meaning only
with reference to the particular point with which the vector a is con1
nected.
in
by
the equa-
to (16) are
The operations
(16)
and
m\
l{
(
and
raising of indices.
and there
will
variant components.
268
From
(12), (15),
and
(11)
100
IX,
or
or
is
simply
~
,
i.e.
in this case
O = #
tk
we have
(20')
?fc
and (VIII. 41). If we had used the real representation of vectors in the special theory of relativity, it would have been
necessary to distinguish between covariant and contravariant comin accordance with (7)
ponents
in
Chapter IV.
It
was
com-
From
norm
The
25), in
and, since this expression is invariant for all coordinate transformations, (21) will hold also for curvilinear coordinates. In fact, we get
from
(18), (15),
and
(11)
1
a\ a'
We may
dt{a; ft
0,a
^=
Sj rt
norm
16)
a,a
a, a'-
22 )
and (17),
^ _ ^^ = ^^
invariant
(23)
b is given
by the
IX,
101
Tensor algebra
The generalization of the tensor
269
101.
calculus developed in
39-44 for
the transformation
i.e.
is
(16)
=
4=
*"*
respectively,
ajc&#*
(25)
&\&Wim
(26)
>
'in
On
we
components
tf
= 0% =
0,i*
t\^gtik ^g
and
ki
vl
>
(28)
In general, t\
All
will
symmetry
be different from
properties like
iik
__
They may
_^ t
ki
(30)
also be expressed as
which, on account of (27), (28), are equivalent to (30). Thus the mixed
k
components t* and t i of a symmetric tensor are equal and may therefore
k
simply be written as t
.
A comparison of (12) and (26) shows that the quantities gik themselves
are the covariant components of a symmetrical tensor of rank 2 the
metric tensor. Further, we see from (7) that the mixed components g* of
270
101
IX,
this tensor are given by the Kronecker symbol 8f and that the contravariant components of the metric tensor are equal to the quantities
lk
g defined by (6).
41,
Similarly, as in the case of Cartesian coordinates considered in
also in the general case form new tensors by the processes
we can now
tensors of rank n
tion of
It
biguous meaning in the general case only if the two tensors belong to
the same point in 4-space. Finally, the process of contraction which in
curvilinear systems of coordinates consists in equating
an upper and a
lower index, and summing, reduces the rank of a tensor by 2. By contraction of a tensor of rank 2 we thus get a tensor of rank 0, i.e. an
invariant. From the transformation law (29) we see at once that
is
forms
/
l
/T
(
Jik
*M
l
(28),
may
n^t
l
(/
ik
f
l
(w\
V)
k-
An example
direct
Let a
.=!,
and from
(12)
where
and
|a|
g'
|a|
\g( k
=
\
dc.g.ci
(34)
& 2g
---,
and
a.
now
by the
is
sign
|a|
If
ex
and
|a|
IX,
102
that a quantity
A lktm
whose components
in every
271
system of coordinates
are equal to the Levi-Civita symbol 8 lWm transforms according to the law
,
A'tklm
From
(35)
and
we thus
(36)
otflSt&lc&A^.
(36)
tensor of rank
4.
by
^^
y_
Fm =
,
^^
g)
(sg)
i.e.
3t
"
'
Two
infinitesimal vectors a 1
b k define
(39)
a parallelogram described by
al b k
is
?Ar
orthogonal to a
ak b l
(40)
lk
.
i.e.
bl
c'
bk
ck
'
or
by
its
(42)
dual pseudo-vector
(43)
which
is
l
orthogonal to the vectors a\ b
^a
The volume V of the
==
Vb
%
parallelepiped
V,c
is
i.e.
0.
given by
p=_F P=-ii
l
ftll
F*.
(44)
272
dm define a four-dimen-
k cl
>
Finally, four infinitesimal vectors a\ b
sional parallelepiped described by the tensor
,
Cl
d*
a*
ck
dk
a
am
cl
d*
cm
flm
;<
bm
102
IX,
(45)
or
V.Wm
V(-flO'
4'
4!
.e.
v<-
V(-P) a
Jf a z
61
(46)
d3
4
a1
(da:
l
0,0,0), b
(0,dx
dZ
This
is
0, 0), etc.,
is
V(-flO dx*dx*dx?<fa*.
(47)
(See
The geodesic
dX
gik
ik
Appendix
5.)
formulae
by the equations
(VIII. 30)
~~
(48)
dA
~dX
mi
Multiplying this equation by g
i,
k,
run
fyu\ dxk d^ _,
we
get,
on account of
(7),
'_^W\^ ^ _
*
or
(49)
103
IX,
273
with
The
Tlkl
quantities Fjj,
symbols.
defined
They obviously
F
by
F'
4-F
(51)
The connexion between F^ and F w is the same as that between the covariant and contravariant components of a tensor but, as we shall see,
t
we
By
therefore get
dx
_ ^ dx'
d\
~
dX
U>
'
w|
(JL
GOL^ CLX
1
ic,'
(J/X
dX
dX
(49) in the
/r\^\
system of coordinates
^ -'diA--
(x'
==0
and, since this equation must hold for independent values of the variables
dx' k /dX, the expression inside the brackets, which is symmetrical in k and
If we multiply the relation obtained in this way by a
I, must be zero.
we
get,
on account of
(11),
By
constant, the
first
274
104. Local
systems
IX,
104
of inertia
we
approximately true
4-space.
in
shall see
a geodesic system
for
which
()g lk /dx
find a
(x'
x'
r
8
r
-x^+\r^(P)(* -~x >)(x*--~x 1 ,)
l
the system (x
we
P we
At the point
get from
(54)
(54)
thus have
&UP)
--
(P)
?|
X
i,
= - r;,(m &;,
(55)
Cj
and
if
we use
(55) in (53)
we
get
l"'u(P)
(56)
at the point P. From (50) and (51) we then find that also Tltkl and
l
are zero at this point. Further, the components of the metric
i jdx
tensor y lk at
are, on account of (55),
the gravitational field has been locally transformed away. The system
of reference R corresponding to the coordinates x l is a local system of
inertia.
o
origin
O
1
- jr*-a+
&=
104
IX,
275
we
get
At the time
coordinates of
m-
r
dw + rs(
,
'
dX~
are
and
x'r
O
At
this
moment
the motion of
0.
rr
8
tJjr
(58)
i) -
we
get simply
d *
dX
0.
(59)
In a small region around P the local system of inertia thus has the same
properties as a usual system of inertia. Without any change in the
X m
1
G lk
in this
new system
for
for
for
(1
--
is
fc=- 1,2,3
(60)
8
'
(P)
0.
(61)
dx-
will
276
104
IX,
o
1
can be
In a small region around P, where terms of second order in
neglected, the metric tensor may be regarded as constant in these
systems.
assumed that
Cartesian coordinates
we may
displacement of vectors
quantities a*'
_ a
a with
l
-\~d if
dt) a
= -r
kl
dx k a
(62)
transform like the contravariant components of a vector at the neighbouring point (x* -\-djr ). From (53), (10), and (11) we obtain
1
(63)
Further,
we
get
by
differentiation of (11)
?*!
ox n
and the
first
term
dJ>n a'
if
we neglect terms
(in
v
dx">
in the brackets
and
4+^ =
(1 1)
Pa* l
^Qx m
'-
may
and
therefore be written
(14).-
da
dx m a n +ot r p
l
r
,
>
=
where
* lH (x+dx)(a*+dp a)
(64)
IX,
105
277
the vector a* 1
system of coordinates in a
the two vectors
flat space,
by the
now
ponents a of a vector at this point are unchanged by parallel displacements exactly as in a pseudo- Cartesian system of coordinates in a
1
pseudo-Euclidean space.
From
1
product of two vectors a
and
from
norm
of a vector,
and
(62)
we
unchanged by a
get
(65)
^f-flV^-^rj^O
we
get
dp (a b
t
dp a l .b l
a l Y kl dxk b
l
Since this equation must hold for an arbitrary vector 6', we get for the
change in the covariant components of a vector by a parallel displace-
ment
d,a t
= TU dx*a, =
r,. lfc
dxW.
means of
(67)
= <7'*a)
(67)
lk
form g a
b kt
we
get
by
278
IX,
105
and, since this equation must hold for arbitrary dx\ a iy 6 t the equation
,
0~1 If
\
must be
==
(68)
identically satisfied.
Multiplying (66) by g
lk
and applying
(7),
we obtain
Hence
(6)
and
(7).
r-
11
(69)
'
later.
If A
(49).
is
is
The equation
(62)
by
along
property which they have in common with the straight lines in a Euclidean space. The geodesic line connecting two points is thus not only the
line
U Uk
l
it is
line,
i.e. g^ k
(67)
and
is
(51),
*% =
This equation
is
rllk
uw = Krw +rM)iw' = ~ ^ v
u*.
(72)
105
IX,
279
total
we
this
The
ment.
closed curve
is
also be true if
vector a*
final
Thus,
if
a vector
is
As
is
of relativity,
we speak of a
if
is
From
a tensor
field
of rank
f (*') =
we can thus
derive a vector
field
grad
grad,*
By means
we
d<f)/dx
0, i.e.
from a scalar
^(x),
</>
field
(73)
g.
(74)
get at once
components of a
vector.
k
/3x will be the mixed components
of a tensor only if the coefficients aj are constant. On the other hand,
280
106
IX,
(
1 1 ), (
14) ,
(p. 276)
(77)
By
we
a'^g+IlX
(78)
Thus, by the process of 'covariant differentiation' (78) of the contravariant components a of a vector w e get the mixed components of a
r
2.
The
respectively.
differences
da 1
a*(P')-a*(P)
f^*
dx k
a (P')-a* (P')
l
a (P )~c
this
If this consideration
vector
field,
we
is
a\ k
find, using
a '-
fc
"~
'
jia '
(79)
IX,
PERMANENT
106
CSRA\
JTATIONAL FIELDS
281
Let us now consider the special case, where we have only a vector
a l (A) connected with each point on a cm ve with the parametric representation
z*=
'(A).
We can then define the covariant derivative of this vector with respect to
The quantity
Do'-
d\
where
llin
P'-+P
_Da*(A)/dA
coordinates #'(A);
rfA
is
[o'(f')-------
AA
with the
Jllll
AA
i"-*p
(80')
a;
(A+AA)
we
''-'
By means
of (51)
we
get
i.e.
According to (71) and (72) the equations for the time track of a free
particle can now also be written
or
d\
d\
k
components V
is
transformed
282
it is
106
IX,
^. tfc
with two contravanant indices and one covariant index, are the mixed
components of a tensor of rank 3. This may be verified in the same way
*W
seen that
it is
Similarly
pr
l
t>k
pr
iv
i
/
t
<MrA,
T-J
AM<r
(82)
f/<
k L
-TTj 'T
These rules
may
ir
]i)
V
t
lr
k~
kl 'r
respectively, of a tensor
Christoffel
field
of rank n,
symbols being n in
this case,
<
Ytlt
-*
dx
(83)
in the case of a scalar field, this rule also applies to tensor fields of
is
rank 0.
a scalar
field,
we have
(M)
'.*,
i.e.
the usual rule for differentiation of a product holds also for covariant
This rule is easily seen to hold for the contracted
differentiation.
The
identities (66)
ak )
and
(68)
g lkjt
i.e.
lk
tl
tl
a k +V k a kil
may now
0,
for instance
be written
g*j
0,
(86)
differentiation of (16)
"i,*
and
k
9ik,i<*>
(17)
we
+g lk a k tl
we have
By
covariant
therefore get
g lk a\i,
a',
g*a kjt
(87)
l
are components of the same tensor of
i.e. the quantities a lk and a
fk
rank 2. In the same way we see that the quantities t ikj, Pk j, and t lkl>
defined by (81) and (82), are components of the same tensor of rank
3.
106
IX,
283
al
field
we thus
get
by
}==a<
On
may
also
fl
(89)
be written
\g\
>
is
obtained
+r< r ar.
is
i.e.
g.
561
</,
www
""
for
now
(91)
(92a)
'
and
similarly
we
T tk are
div ( {Tt
*}
= T** =
^L^(\g\)Tf)-r
r, ta
T'<.
(926)
this reduces to
T"
on account of (51).
For an antisymmetrical tensor
F lk
(92c)
is
zero on
284
we
Further,
106
IX,
The
(43), (47),
and
(90),
we get
an arbitrary vector
for
is
obvious.
field
a 1 in the
Using
(3
+ 1)-
space
f div{a}
dZ
--=
,f
(V(-(7)a
a' dV> =-
J a'V(-ff)
where (dx k ),
(A#
(8xf),
WI
107.
dimensional boundary
8 ljHwl
rf^S^A^,
(95)
field
by covariant differentiation. It
and
may
l\^
(96)
Similarly the tensor of rank 3 obtained by a further covariant differentiation can be written in the two forms
n
a
k,lm
where ar
is
;Z
^a k l
t
*fafi~~~
rr
L
n
km ar,l~~ lr lrn a
k,r
r
~
-
^ ak
~^rn~~
>
r
rr km n r '~~ 1F lm
n
a
k,r*
'
(W\
Jl )
(87).
Using the first expression (96) in the first form of a klm in (97), we
get an expression for a k tlm which is a linear function of a and its first
and second derivatives. However, if we subtract the tensor a k tml obtained
l
where the
pi
Wm
~~
f_fc!
ftr"*
--
km
by
pi
^f~
(96)
and
(97),
/QQ\
'
"^,*aS
(100)
107
IX,
285
where
___
jf
f_2_f.W
v*i,km
pr
pr
Since the left-hand sides of (98) and (100) are the components of a
any vector field a,, the quantities R'um and K lM n must be the
tensor for
*'u
4, i.e.
ff'-^H.
(102)
The
tensor
lk is
easily seen to be
if
1
process will in general differ from the vector a
Aa
a*
a1
it
may now
Aa
be verified by elementary
a* t
ai
where
dtfx m
Aa
dx m
iWlIl
a*
d<fi",
(104)
y*.
RMm =
bviOU8ly
space. It
is,
it is
is
transformed components
/l
(x
(see
(105)
This equation
points,
0-
Appendix
6).
g'lfc
makes the
286
From
(101)
IX,
107
it
the relations
k +-R lmkl
Q.
(1066)
we
a k,lmn
a k',mln
== ~~
by covariant
^klnnn a i~~
differentiation
klm
Adding
)i-
by
permuta-
cyclic
account of (1066), while the other three cancel with the terms
second bracket on the right-hand side of (107). Hence we get
we
>
in
the
are led
On
0.
(108)
108.
By
and
in a two-dimensional space.
X*
As the
==
^rk
last expression is
-^fcr
= ~^rk ^
equal to the
is
first
with
*,*%
i
^*rr
and k interchanged,
further contraction
we
p. 169.
Bergmann,
(no)
*=
t See, e.g., P. G,
this
obviously symmetrical
** = **
By
(109)
*t
Introduction
0**,
to the
(in)
fc
Theory of
Relativity,
New
York, 1942,
IX,
108
287
and
*m,
+ X'km.>-Bt
Ht
Or
R n -2Bt ul
by multiplication by
m gives
0.
(#*- iy'^U =
o.
(112)
This equation expresses the fact that the covariant divergence of the
symmetrical tensor
is
On account
zero.
of the
\g*
(113)
symmetry property,
From
for
R lk
(109), (99),
and
(69)
we
~^
_
~"
fc
llkr
lk
'
'
Mechanics
fields
BY means
Let us
first
xl
,/
/i\
(1)
x*(r)
be the equation of the time track of the motion, r being the proper time
of the particle measured by a standard clock following the particle. The
contravariant components of the four- velocity are then, on account of
(VIII. 98),
where U
velocity
di
tf=*
dr
(IV.er),
(2)
and
l
f
is
field
and (VIII.
by (IX.
16)
i.e.
(4)
X,
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
'109
289
K
y lK U are the covariant components of the three-dimensional
velocity vector, calculated from the contravariant components by
where u
x'
x'i(x*)
x'*>
x*
(5)
course
[/t
= _^
(6)
and
(4) for
and
are obviously
A = DU*
r- =
ar
<W*
-~j
ar
MU u
DU
A - ~y
dU
---
>
dr
ar
T
E7*t7'
u
l /lA u
.
(7)
(t)
we have
UA =
l
U^A,
0.
(7')
P>
rfe
P -
C/%
7&
19
(8)
where
local rest
T-* T =
dr
In a general system (x
'>-
dr
DP
where
(10a)
dr
dr
(106)
,, tfc
four-momentum
vector.
200
DP
109
X,
According to (IX.
l
l
l
through the distance dx = U dr of the vector P (r) connected with the
l
point x (r). Thus the equations (9) express the fact that the four-
momentum
110.
is
On
account of (IX.
51),
the last
The equations
the functions g lk
field is
weak
in
on g lk
be neglected.
may
The
If p t
=p
construct a
t (t)
is
= mu
= mu =
l
mu
we can
means of the
is
thus the
r,
y LK
g iK +r,r^
(14)
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
110
X,
it is
if'
where
is
1, 2,
291
may
be written
= * = mG"
(15)
K = mG m
also
gravitational field with the potentials (y t x). Since
L
L
represents the gravitational mass of the particle. For a particle at rest,
the mass reduces to
o
,
this case
it is
l=
first
we put
K=
_JJ*
OX 1
mG=
-mgradx,
(17)
o,
On
the other hand, for weak fields where the dynamical potentials
(y x) may be treated as small, we find, neglecting terms of second order
in these quantities as well as in u/c, that (11) is identical with (15) if
t
we put
292
^=
where
is
X,
110
i"""^
the space tensor defined by (VIII. 110) for the case of weak fields.
last term in (18) is of the type of a Coriolis force. On the rotating
The
disk considered in
90,
we have
x
corresponding to the form (VIII. 83) of the line element, and in the
approximation corresponding to
(18)
-(
c
(18')
02-0
c
Hence
2
c
000
and
we
A = (m^x+Zmuu 2 ma^yZmwu
r
1
,
0).
'
(18")
'
and the
Coriolis force,
values of ujc the last term in (18) will then be small compared with
the first term. Further, if the field is stationary or quasi- stationary,
t
is
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
110
X,
The
293
upon by a
with respect to
is
defined
components p
by
Since the spatial metric tensor y lK may depend on /, dc p jdt and dc pjdt
will not in general be the components of the same space vector. A calcul
yiA^/^v = &
dt
dt
K =
where
*Y**
pA
dt
(19 >)'
ft
KK
derivative of the
dp,
dp
V+^dt
=d
c p,
dr p
dT p
nT r
- 8y
ll
(20)
by
(20/)
'
df*
i.e.
momentum
vectors at different
momentum
vector
is
we
Thus,
is
get
~
m-
^
'
v2
mW -~
*S^
'
294
and,
if
.e.
rigid,
(20')
may
=, 0.
both u and
ra are
110
constant
be written
(20"')
Hence, in
space,
is
X,
move on
potentials are zero, the action of the gravitational field has the character
of a 'normal reaction' from the curved three-dimensional space.
111. Total
field
While the first three equations of the set (11) represent the equations
4
of motion of the particle, the fourth equation corresponding to i
must be the law of conservation of energy. In this section, we consider
^=
i
e.
I\
is
in question
becomes
(21)
0,
which on account of
(4) is
cP^
of the form
Appendix
7).
For small
velocities
we
get, neglecting
terms of
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
111
X,
295
since the terms of first order in the velocities cancel. // represents the
energy of a particle in the field If we retain the terms of second order
rest
in u/c,
we
H - # +|mX,
and
for
weak
(24)
fields this
of a particle in a field
ff
AoC
+jA
tt
+AoX-
(25)
The last two terms represent the kinetic energy and the potential energy,
respectively. For large velocities such a decomposition of the energy
into a kinetic part and a potential part is not possible.
112.
If the particle
is
^^=0,
where
is
(27)
system of coordinates
equations (27) and
itself.
If
we put
F =
L
r$5n
J\=rg, -(3.u)).
dr.T,
we
(2)
i.e.
Since dt
(x
we
find, in
may
the same
way
as in
(28)
be written
j
(29)
which shows that the space vector g with the covariant components
= FJT must be interpreted as the non-gravitational force on the
3f
t
particle.
296
112
X,
Further, in the case of a stationary gravitational field, the fourth equation (26) can be written
tf *
~p
**>
dr
or,
by means of
(14), (22),
and
^jf
(28),
= (.u)=8fe*
(30)
Since the right-hand side is equal to the work done by the force g per
unit time, this equation expresses the law of conservation of energy.
113.
that
is
"oc
where
W LK
0,
*'*
=/*(**),
(31)
(32)
g'^
fields
described
by
1
lk
arbitrary functions g lk or g in the system (x ).
From
(IX. 7)
we
n 'il n
9 941
t4
i.e.
0'
n'i*n
#44
(J
44
-0,
<7'
&l
d
4>
--!-
(33)
(/44
in
t4
</'
For f*(xk
(34)'
v
'
'
2 3)
'
(35)
= J- =
|, fl<7""
grad,/* grad'/
<
0.
(36)
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
113
X,
first
we then
(x)
order
grad'/g
Each
= 0.
(37)
%=
known
be considered
must
A =
may
297
(38)
>
grad*/
functions.
The general
g'
== 0'
i4
o or y\
0.
disappearance of the vector potentials, in the future we often take advantage of this possibility and use time-orthogonal systems of coordinates.
In the preceding discussion, the function / 4 (x) was chosen arbitrarily
apart from the very mild restrictive condition (36). We shall now see
also possible, by a suitable choice of the function / 4 (a;), to
the scalar potential vanish. On account of (34), the condition x
that
it is
i.e. 0'
44
44
1/0'
4
,
i.e.
0>
make
the
norm
(39)
(x)
298
X,
113
gravitational potentials are zero. In a system of this type, the gravitational force
occurring in (15) is zero, and the motion of a free particle
is of the type discussed on p. 293. If the initial velocity of the particle
is zero, we see at once from (20") that the particle will remain at rest in
this system. The different points of reference in the system may thus be
represented by an assembly of freely falling material particles, a circumstance which may be used in the practical determination of the trans-
the gravitational
fields is
phenomena in this system very complicated. In the treatment of cosmological problems in Chapter XII we shall, however, make use of this
possibility.
(See
133, 134.)
may
div,{7**}
ii
= 0.
(40)
(see
IX. 92 c)
in a
system of inertia
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
114
X,
299
the right-hand side of (41). This indicates that the system is no longer
closed when placed in a gravitational field which itself may contribute
to the total energy
and momentum.
We
126.
in
ing of
5T
is
may
system. Relative to
motion relative to
particle f
is
zero.
is
Hence
0.
Appendix
|y t
(42)
ponents of the spatial metric tensor (VIII. 64), is connected with the
determinant g
0,
\g lh
by the equation g
g^.y and, since g
<
>
0,
we have
(43)
The equation
(42)
may
thus be written
Now, putting
Ti
t A. D. Fokker, Proc. Amsterdam, 23, No.
Henri Pomcare, t. XI, fasc. V, 251 (1950).
5,
(45)
300
may
(44)
X,
114
is
be written
-7
divS +
^=
(46)
0,
where
the three-dimensional divergence of the space vector S (cf. the analogous expression (IX. 90) for the four-dimensional divergence).
is
local
As we
126, the
shall see in
momentum
density
is
2, 3).
similarly given
by
(47)
is
a perfect
the
fluid,
energy-momentum tensor
where
k
=^
(x
is
j5,
V*.
(49)
TJ"
A(f
From
and
(6)
we get by covariant
since
we have
Thus,
if
^U-^+(A
^)-^./i
o-
(so)
differentiation
= U\ U
= 0.
l7.J7
U\ k
ltk ,
(51)
lffc
we multiply
by U we
l
(50)
obtain
o.
(52)
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
114
X,
On
and
account of (IX.
79, 80")
301
we now have
thus reduces to
(50)
= 0,
/a.^
dr
(53)
is the generalization of (IV. 215) for the case in which the gravitational forces are the only forces acting on the matter.
comparison
with (IX. 80 1V ) shows that each infinitesimal part of incoherent con-
which
From
*
and
is
(4)
moving
we
like
=(54)
where F
is
is
dx dx*dx*dt
S/(i</l)
we thus
(14)
we
$,
d& d$?dr.
dV of the material
particle
7T/
ft i/
Ct/
.j
<
\Jt\t
//'>**/7
x**v/ /y*"
irT/ Cl/t*/
Cc/vt/ Ct/C/
<
dF
dV9
"IU
fT2J
dV
dr
J*
7~f ~7zl
(55)
This
is
dV
dV,
(56)
i.e.
p. 223.
If T&O
o
^5<>
H = h dV is obtained from
(54)
and
(55)
(57)
302
X,
115
115.
of electrodynamics in
system of coordinates
form
in the
0-^1*
+
,
ki
+
,
3Fh
=o
*Q
'
(59)
F
Here, F
current density, p
kl
lk
of inertia, and
is
is
the electromagnetic field tensor, s l is the fourthe charge density measured in a local rest system
On
f/* is
Flk
we
which
is
'
(60)
summation over
with respect to x l x 2
,
rr
and
first
3
,
Vlff
s*
dx*dx*dx*
0.
(61)
h+
^s*J7 dx dx*dx*==
[(
dV
(62)
is
(63)
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
115
X,
303
must be the charge density in the system $. Now consider the charge
o
Q
p dV connected with a volume element dV\ if dV represents the corresponding volume in the local rest system, we get from (63) and (55)
p
dV
dV Q
(64)
i.e.
is
indepen-
The invariance of the total electric charge also follows directly from the
continuity equation (60). Consider two arbitrary systems of coordinates
S and S' and the integrals
e=
J\g\ s*
dx l dx*dz*
(65)
x 4 -a
e'
l
<J\g'\8'*dx' dx'*dx'*
(65')
#4
On
respectively.
and
(65')
we
constant
#' 4
and
constant
6,
can, without
4
l
J\g* s" dx" dx"*dx"*
1
and, since x"
#'
6, (66)
Vl/
x'*^x*^a
x'*^jr' 4
x on the hypersurface x4
1
6.
As the
we have
#' 4
<*"
(66)
=b
a and x'fi
x' 1 in
the region
(67)
H,
(68)
can be written
-=0
Vy
(60)
dt
or
divpu
H +
= 0,
^Vy
dt
(69)
304
115
X,
we assume
B IK
Fut
_ _#"_
"V(l+2x/c
and
..
'
__
'__
V(l+2x/
IK
and
by the equations
"
'
__&_
1+2X/C
'
(71)
H ___
_
IK
BIK
___
__
^V(l + 2 X /c
From
)'
^79^^
Vtl+Sx/c*)'
IK
T) __ __
(1
(j
vim
i/tjy/cw*
we
(71),
.,,
(J
php __ v
1/tXy KH L
ri
With these
U-
may
be written
o,
r.
fir.
(74)
vy
bt
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
115
X,
where
curl
curiu
^
curl...E
,
*A
IK
305
At
&EI
= #* -iWAC
-
ftr 1
(75)
divD
LK
by
**//!
(see
Appendix
Vy//
23
-^*-^|
=
= Vy^
//2
Vy//
31
12
//3
,76,
5),
div
CV/y
~~
(77)
},
,
curl
HT
(VyD)
-
\y
where curl
curl l/c
E and curlH
pll
!
,.
div
C ct
D=
~.
H, respectively. For a
rigid
E and
is
time-
be written
D=
E,
B - M H,
(78a)
:,
(786)
we
see that the gravitational field, besides its influence on the spatial
geometry, acts like a medium with the dielectric and magnetic constants (78*6).
The electromagnetic
is,
four-force acting
*
c
F*W<.
3595.80
get,
(79)
by means of
(2)
and
(73),
306
X,
116
particle
is
(80)
defined
by
(76),
be written
may
(81)
where u X
(u
is
x B)
Vy(tt
-w 3 ,B
2
,
u*B l -u l
*>
u l B 2 -u*JB l
(81')
Appendix 5).
For a system with continuously distributed charge the force on the
charge in a volume element dV is given by (81 with e = p dV. Therefore
the force density f must be
(see
(82)
which
ponderable matter.
lf(E l
(V. 93)
V,
(73), leads to
+B
(83)
the expressions
*><*.")
(84)
\
V(T+
field.
(87)
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
116
X,
where
dV Q U
/l
the
is
(14), these
and
The
may
equations
= K+f dV,
%?
at
similar to (29)
307
*Z
at
also
(f .
particle.
On
be written
(88)
u) dV,
(30).
magnetic force
is
energy.
system of
inertia
fl
-di
5*
where
Sf
S\
=F
F*
-^\(Flm F
(90)
is
Using
(71), (73),
and
(76) in (90)
we
is
of the tensor S*
(91 a)
where
ExH
and
DXB
by (8 1') or by
and (6) in Appendix 5.
From (45), (47), and (91) we get for the electromagnetic energy flux,
-energy density, and momentum density
the equations
(5)
= -(DxB).
c(ExH),
= KE.D+H.B),
(92)
(93)
71,
72)
308
1
17.
Propagation of light in a
117
X,
Fermat's
principle
and y lK and x are indepenIn a static gravitational field, where y
dent of the time variable the electromagnetic field equations (77) take
the form of Maxwell's phenornenological equations in a medium at rest
t
with
w=
= -p-- =
/(l+-%\
in a
in
(94)
The
10),
two points A and B in space is a miiumum for the actual path chosen
by the light ray. Mathematically this is expressed by the variational
1}
^
principle
*^-
8j
may
==0
(95)
r)
A and
B. Since y lK
g iK in
be written
L(x x )dX
i
---
(96)
with
x (X)
Here, A is an arbitrary parameter in a parametric representation x
of the curve considered. According to the equations (21), (24) in 86, the
condition (96) is equivalent to the Euler equations
l
M'LJl = M
dX^ig^x*^)!
.A
w VtoicA*^) =
w*
~j(
w=
constant
dx c
we may choose
(98
'
l
it
so
(99)
ON PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
117
X,
dc u
_d
7T " dX
L
((/LK
^v
(98).
~~
309
uPSx*
2 dx'
MOO}
(
(90) comj)letely
071
The same
result
is
light ray
zero.
may
\vill
=
we get from
the
first
field
~~
!^\-o
;
\r-.i
By
0.
equations with
the
Further,
if
(101)
'
dX)
constant
w *.t-~
made
(102)
1,
which shows that the parameter A defined by (102) is identical with the
parameter defined by (99). For i = 1, 2, 3 we then get from (VIII. 87)
-~
d\
LK
iK
=^
~2 3x L
----2 fa 1
p.
(6),
XI
Poisson's equation
where
6-664
4 &
(1)
sec.~
(2)
(l9w)
1S
component
44
it is
^ _
m
the form
T
K -*iki
ik
field
equations are of
,*
('*)
ik
where
ct
and
c2
z=
R +c
lk
R.g lk +c^g lk
(4)
Ann.
d.
118
XI,
311
On
the equations
.
case of
empty
Tlk
space, where
0.
lk
The equations
(3)
then reduce to
0.
(5)
when the
values of g lk
^=
If
constant
a.
(6)
x' 1
xl
x'*(x),
x' 1
by
(7)
x*(x')>
M'lk
0,
(9)
where, on account of the covariance of the equations (5), M'lk are the
same functions of g'lk dg'lk /dx' d*g'lk /dx' dx' m as M^ k of g lk dg lk /dz?
m
Thus, by the same argument as before, the equations
d*g lk /dx dx
l
the transformations
#4
.= a,
(7)
such that
x'
g\ k (x')
a,
on this surface, and glk (x' ) must consequently be the same function of
the variables (x /l ) as g^x1 ) is of (x1 ). This is, however, in contradiction to
1
(8), which shows that the dependence of g'rk on (x' ) for points sufficiently
4
far from the surface x
a will, in general, differ from the functional
1
Thus, if the
the quantities
(x
).
field
lk
p.
395 (1915).
312
XI,
118
the transformations
As we have seen
momentum
thef rm
Thus,
if
114, the
in
Th =
div (T{)
4
the tensor
(10)
^ ^^
are
lk
-=0.
components of
lk
on the
left-hand side of the field equations satisfy the four identities (11).
and,
if
this
12)
to be identically zero,
is
we now
get from
(4)
we must have
q = -J.
Thus, putting
c2
=^-
A,
where A
lk
and the
field
equations
(3)
is
a universal constant,
K, k -\R<J>k ~\g tk
we
get
(4')
M,k-- K lk -\Eg lk -^ tk
- K T, k
-=
(12)
contraction
By
we
where
is
obtain,
tf?--|#8{ -AS*
-*!*.
since R\ ~ R, S[ =
j?-f 4A - KT,
T=
(13)
4,
(14)
T\
(15)
Tlk
(16)
XI,
119
313
fields,
differential equations, f
weak
field
is
of the form
,A+A,A.
(17)
where O lk is the constant metric tensor (VIII. 41) of the special theory,
and the h lk and their derivatives are small quantities whose squares
may be neglected. The ( hristoffel symbols (IX. 50) will then obviously
be small of the first order and, in the curvature tensor (IX. 99, 114), we
can neglect all terms depending on the squares of the Christoffel sym1
bols.
Hence we get
R '*
_^
~
~dx k
rs
=
^
/%< t ^A_J
p^+^^M--"
dx
dx \8x
rV
dx
dx
JL
2
.a*
2
ftE^af
xr dxs
i/ &*.
2\dx'dx
&%
a'AH
dx r dx k
dx dx r )'
Let us now
first
=G
rs
h ls
h rr
G'h rs
(19)
among
t.
where x
jR 44
we then
is
is
we
have, to a
first
approximation,
(21)
}
f A. Einstein, Berl. Ber., p.
688 (1916).
314
(16)
with
= >.
Now we know that Poisson's equation
static
and
119
XI,
is
(22)
can therefore conclude that the constant A must be so small that the
A-term
may
be neglected for
all
gravitational
phenomena
inside the
for cosmological
A equal to zero.
The
field
R lk -\Rg, k
^-*T
(23)
lk .
1-87
X 10- 27 cm gm.- 1
must
(24)
^ ^ X ^8x
where Sx (#0
J
is
a function which
small to the
is
(25)
first
an
expression for the transformed metric tensor of the same form as (17).
Since the left-hand side of (23) is small to the first order, the same must
Tlk may
The expression
with
x?
The quantities
(18) for
A*-i8*A,
Xi*
*i*~ !#,**,
the form
= *!
(27)
I?
t See
D. Hilbert,
Gfitt.
(28)
XI,
119
For
Rlk
R we
and
then get
*tfc
and the
315
/Z=*J = inA,
4DAifc,
(29)
field
These equations are of the same form as the equations (V. 26) for the
electromagnetic potentials, and the solutions of (30) which vanish at
'
X,i(*S
where
/(
**
'
x' l )A.
(x
~^^
C)
l~
<te'WW,
(31)
'
i=lT2,3
by (3 1 ) also satisfy the conditions (28), they must be the required solutions
of the approximate field equations (23).
solutions
In the latter case, this proof is based on the law of conservation of electric
charge (see V. 41 ). In the present case, the validity of (28) follows in the
3T
may
k
a?
From
h lk
(31)
First
X\
hence,
= h\~2h =
-h,
by means of
(31),
arid
momentum which,
be written
<
32)
h lk
x^k+\G^k h
xifc-l^xj;
(33)
T'dV
*"-/
and
h lk
tk
g?
-?*
'*
dP,
(34)
ZTT J
where the prime in T'lk and T means that these quantities have to be
taken at the place (x' ) of the volume element dV = dx' l dx' 2dx' 3 and at
the retarded time tr/c.
r
120*
fields.
The
/*(#, y, z)
is
316
x'
(x,y,z).
^=
7
"44
8,48^,
-A
T=-A
2
.
IN
XI,
120
(34),
4-
[X--X'|
(35)
KC 2 C
h
and
p<>(x
i/'
z')dx'd!/'dz'^
we
get,
_,
on account of
(24),
the usual
(36)
Hence the
line
ds 2
element
is
of the form
k
(Glk +h lk ) dx*dx
(37)
where x
The
*s
given by
(36).
da^
is
/I--?
(38)
measured. At the surface of the earth, for instance, the quantity 2^/c 2
of the order of magnitude 10~ 9
For a system of material particles with the masses M\, M%,... situated
at the places X^
2 ,..., respectively, we get from (36)
is
(39)
For a
symmetrical.
and the
line
We have
+^
(2k
1
r=|x-X|
(40)
XI,
120
317
Thirring and Lensef calculated, for instance, the influence of the rotation
of a central astronomical body on the gravitational field and the corre-
sponding effects on the motion of the satellites. All such effects are too
small to be observed J and we shall not consider them here.
There
is
tional
forces originating
celestial
The approximate
fields
fields.
is
constant inside
>v
M
= - K *%,
*-r 2
4?r
(41)
where
equations
(30), is similar to
t
j
the
field in
(1916).
318
120
XI,
we have
42 >
/7T44
-*
From
(IV. 198)
we
Hence, by means of
is
2)
C f^-*,
J
P
- J{( x - x + y - y >)*+ z
')*
ring.
of the ring
(34),
A lfc (*,y,
where
(x, y, z)
Further,
(43)
(44)
*}
and the
line
element ds on the
and
2
c2
c2
o>
y'x'
2
,
1
-
c
1
JP2
i-i*-?..
o
i+i
2
2
'
(45')
We
COS,
XI,
we
120
get
1 /,
319
# 2 +v 2 +z 2
a
,
00
x
V mi?
^ +r
+2 ^
a/
<w
'+-
(46)
#'
i.e.
CTTOJ
^34==
(47)
where
3f
==
3f (l
RW/c
)-*
values of
for
In this
way
E
in the expression for
a>
gr 44 ,
MKC*
a)
<-->
,
AN
320
moving
is
plane
XI,
120
18')
clockwise.
MKC 2 /^7rfi
MKC*
mean
the Coriohs forces, are even of the usual form as regards their
dependence on the coordinates (x,y,z). On the other hand, the scalar
rise to
on
force
same
homogeneous rotating
shell.
The purely
equations (30), which require explicit assumpboundary conditions at infinity in order to give
do not give an adequate description of the world as a
field
unique solutions,
whole.
on
2
(jJ
+j/
2
)
and
22
by
l,
t B. and T. Fnedldnder, Absolute und relative Bewegung, Berlin, 1896.
(50)
XI,
120
it is
321
sideration is, of course, very rough, since the linear equations probably
represent a bad approximation when applied to the world as a whole;
but, as we shall see in
133, the relations (49) and (50) also follow from
ideal
by means
we
Finally, if
with the velocity of light and carrying with them a certain amount of
As shown by
energy.
emitted in this
way
astronomical effect.
121. Equivalent
systems
of coordinates.
symmetry
Let
g lk
(x
x' 1
x' l (x*),
(51)
(x>r)
f\^l
wm
W* w***W
<
52)
i.e.
1
(x'
and
(x'
for
any physical process will have the same course of development in the
two systems. The existence of equivalent systems of coordinates imposes
a certain condition on the gravitational field, since the functions (7i&(#0
obviously must satisfy the functional equations
Emstem,
Berl.
Ber
p. 154 (1918).
322
IN
121
XI,
for all
X*=/^),
we have
ds*
- glk dx dx =
k
(54)
Glk dX*dX
(55)
JT*
A>k
Xk
(56)
v//
.A
__
ft{
-G
k
g lk dx*dx
lk
and, since
g'lk
dX*dX k
(54),
by means of
/
r7
(*<
we have
G'lk
G lk
G[ k
,K
J (%
(x'
dX'*dX' k
g\ k
dx'*dx'*,
constant,
(a'*)
The
transformation
x' 1
x' (x l )
l
non-permanent gravitational
field
fields,
generally not
that the g lk are
is
it
are form -in variant under the sub-group of spatial orthogonal transformations. Such systems are naturally called spherically symmetric. Putting
xl
(x,c)
(x,y,z,ct),
dx
+dy +dz
x dx-\-y
dy-\-z dz
is
x *+y*+ z *}\,
=.
dr*+r* d0
r dr,
dt,
+r
dr
2
sin
and
\
2
rff
1.
(58)
121
XI,
323
2
general possible expression for ds in a system with spherical
is therefore
ds 2
2
F(r,t) dr +G(r
2
t
t)(r
d0 2 +r 2 sin 2
+ 2H(r,
where F, G, H,
may
drdt+L(r,
t)
dt 2
(59)
only.
t,
ordinates. Introducing a
tion
we
and
are functions of r
This expression
t)
2
d</> )
symmetry
new
variable
r' 2
r*G(r
instead of
r'
by the transforma(60)
t),
new
variables
is
of the form
+ 2N(r',t) dr'dlt+0(r',t) dt
2
.
(61)
The
present case.
Hence
ordinate clocks to
defined
o> tK
quantities
it is
make
by
(62)
t'=f(r',t),
which will not affect the second term in (61). Dropping the primes, the
line element may thus be expressed in the standard form
ds 2 == a dr 2
where
are functions of r
a(r,
+r
t),
(d0
b
+sm
b(r,
bc 2 dt 2 ,
2
d<f>
t)
(63)
= +C"
I
(64)
52),
must be
positive
122. Static
lk
defined
Vu
by
(4')
aM>
=
022
r *>
I/as
With x
2
(r,6,(f>,ct)
r sin 0,
44
==
-6,
we have
(65)
(66)
324
and the
Christoffel
IN
XI,
12J
a
_
~'
r? 2
1
r 22
-,
~'r
1
r
I
3s
-sin
</>
---,
cos e,
<5in2/?
r? 3
]
,
1
r
I
_
-
r|3 -=
r? 4
cotff,
=
lo
(68)
system to essentially
one equation, only, by means of which the components
3 may
\
be expressed in terms of M\, M\, and dM\/dr. The calculations give the
M =M
M*.
"""'
Ml- Ml- -2
2a[\b)
-
a b
+
2\6 /
+ br
-A.
are easily
123
XI,
325
M we
r-
r2
abr
v
(706)
;
a)
1
[76Y
la'
1/6V
6'
^>
a'b+ab'
of~~~
a z br
i.e.
(ab)'
ab
or
_
~
(71)
(72)
(73)
r2,
by
ry'+2/-l + Ara
By
integration
Ar 2
(yr)'
we thus
equations.
constant.
or
C)
Putting
first
(7
(74)
(75)
get
A? 3
'iy
where
is
(73)
-- 2m,
(76)
a constant of integration, or
From
and
(77)
we
=!_*?*!.
y
o
(77)
The
of (63)
we
which
in
our case
is
thus
2
neglect the small A-term, da will in the limit of large r go over
the
usual
line
element
into
for a Euclidean space in polar coordinates,
If
326
IN
XI,
123
Euclidean space. In the actual space (79), r will, however, not simply
be the radial distance, the distance between two points (r^d^) and
(r 2 0,
,
(f>)
An
try to
(1
Ar 2 /3)~* dr.
2m/r
(80)
picture the quantity r plays the role of the distance from the centre, and
the distance / measured by standard measuring-rods has 110 real impor-
According to
,
\)
(72)
we have
constant
=_
-^
constant X
/.
2m
Ar 2 \
/01X
(81)
3;
^ /2
2m/r
.2/,/#2
2fl
/]
7J,2\
Ar 2 /3
^W
(82)
or, if
we
values of
is
r,
2m IT
dt*.
(83)
1-^ =
0,
(84)
ro
we may conclude that the 'radius' of the mass must be larger than the
value determined by (84). The singularity at r = r cannot be completely
removed by the use of other 'static' coordinates. It can, however, be
f
K. Schwarzschild,
Berl.
Ber
p. 189 (1916)
123
XI,
r', 6,
327
<,
defined
by the transformation
r
The
line
'
+ -p'
r>
\{(r*-2mr)*+r~m}.
(85)
^
(86)
2m
rQ
|m, and
seen that in (86) the singularity has been removed from the spatial
part of the line element, but it appears again in (/ 44 which vanishes at
the same place. As shown by Sermi, Einstein, and Pauli,f no nonit is
course,
in
"=
(-1/44-
me 2
c2
0^
--
(8?)
'
c2
we*
(-^4-1)3-
~/ (H
l /2 /)2J
by the
,/
relation
m=
i
L->
1/f
vl
^^
C"
field is
<>
-*
ifC* VI
KCjXl
-.
(88)
877
r'sin#cos0,
?/
r'sin#sin</,
/'cos^.
(86")
On
1
Senni, Atti Accad Lmcei (5), 27 , 235 (1918), A Einstein, Revista (Unw Nac.
11
A
Einstein
and
2,
Tncuman), A,
Pauh, Ann. oj Math. 44, 131 (1943).
(1941),
A, 53, 51 (1933), see also J L.
J (i E Lemaitre, Ann *S oc. Scient. Bruxellex, S'*i
Syngo, Proc Roy Insh Soc 53, No 6, 83 (1950)
328
element
if
we introduce a
non-static
IN
system of coordinates
123
XI,
r', 0,
<f>,
t'
by
the transformations
r
The
line
dt'
(9m/2)i(r'-cO,
dt~ (2m/ r)
dr.
(89)
2m/ r
2
rf<
)-c
eft'
(90)
where
by
9m
dr' 2
).
On
perfect fluid
is
On
account of the
field
equations
(13),
M\ =
and the expressions
icTf,
(92)
field
to (X.
2, 3)
and
(65),
(92')
124
XI,
Using
this
1
*
mk
J. *
get for
k\
d(J\a\T
/
^VV I"
I
If
A
\J
T*r _ mis
J.
'
we
J[
-,
/QQ\
7O
I
f^fn
llftl
-ri,*
or,
329
by means of
(68)
and (IX.
69),
This equation gives the dependence of the pressure on the scalar gravitational potential in the equilibrium state of a fluid under the influence
of its own gravitational field. The other three equations of the conservation laws (93) do not give anything new.
equations (92) again reduce to only two independent equations for which we may take the equations
The
field
M\ - - K T\,
Mi - -KTl
(95)
=
~\ll --}+*
a
r2
abr
(96a)
<$,
The equations
(706)
by the substitution
A->A+^c
2
.
we
in (78)
to be
must be put
get
1
where
2m
is
_ ^ Qr
JP
r2
^-,.
1
J?2
(98)
330
By
IN
by
XI,
integration
therefore have
-7,
constant.
a*r
we obtain
^WL^I^^A,
is
a constant. Putting y
instead of r, (99)
(99)
dr
where A
x
(1
we
/,
a\or
124
V6 and introducing a
may also be written
r 2 /# 2 )*
y-xfy =
new
A.
variable
(100)
(ji/JC
The
solution of (100)
where
is
ds*
=A
Bx,
a constant of integration.
Hence
Thus we
is
2
?/
--
(.4
B<J(\-
r 2 /fl 2 )) 2 .
(101
(103)
The
spatial
geometry
is
defined
by the
line
element
8
).
(104)
origin r
measured by standard
(105)
t
p 424(1916).
XI,
124
331
t
r\
is
2rr
r with a
Consider a sphere of fluid filling the space inside r
r 1 we then have the solution
constant proper density of mass /2,. For r
(103), while Schwarzschild's exterior solution (82) must be valid for
<
>
and
rx
We now
r v further,
and
so that (103)
has to be zero at the surface of the
sphere. If we neglect the A-term, which anyhow has only a small effect
inside the solar system, these conditions lead to the equations
A =
(107)
M = ^ r?A
r
which
is
(108)
r l in
a Euclidean space.
is
on the other hand, /l was the mass density measured in a local system of
inertia which differs from the mass density in the system of coordinates
is exactly
used here. Actually we shall show in 128 that the quantity
volume
Vl
by
c2
Anyhow, the
is
in all
astronomical applications very small. In the case of the sun, for instance,
we may put
/t
3
l-4gm. cm.-
rl
6-95x 10 10 cm.
(109)
332
Hence we get
(110)
rl
satisfied; for
amply
...
As
in the case of
/?1 r+-> ..
A
lfj~6
1U
<.
-?&2 r^
2m
rl
coordinates.
>
defined
determination of r v
We also see that the condition
2m
124
2X10- 3
'
XI,
3-5X
is
IN
1
1
a(r), b(r) in
(63), this
may
be
VWy,
(111)
is
(112)
where
C is an arbitrary
constant.
The
line
(113)
=
where
For
L. (dx*+dy*+dz*) - 6c 2
and the
line
form
by
(97)
dt*
(86").
we thus
get
form
fluid.
124
XI,
333
the form
l~2m/r+Ke
'
/r
(116)
The
ratio of the
respectively,
is
K6 2
477-e
the. mass,
(111)
'
rMc 2
r.2m
In the case of an electron, the two terms will therefore become of the
same order of magnitude at a distance corresponding to the classical
2
2
Both terms will, however, have negligible
electron radius a
e /Jfc
effects
Further, exact solutions of the field equations for the case of arbitrary
cylindrically symmetrical distributions of matter
and by
125.
Levi-Civita.||
The
Let
Jl==
RdZ= R
(
where
Rlk g lk is
k
lk g*
l
<J(g) dx dx*dx*dx\
(118)
||
which
is
arbitrary inside S,
(5),
Berlin, 1920.
334
first
S/!
By
IN
%Rik J(~g)g lk
variation of (119)
we
dx+f
is
XI,
125
derivatives
then
R lk S(V(-W) dx.
(120)
get
(121)
While the Christoffel symbols T\ transform according to the transformation equations (IX. 53) which, on account of the first term on the
right-hand side, differ from the transformation law of tensors, the variation SFJ.,, which is the difference between two Christoffel symbols at the
t
same
derivative
will also
8r
).
^J+
sr&-rj w sr;,-rr
r*mr
ffl
8r; r
8^
?fc
(122)
in the simple
form
fc
(123)
-(sri*).,.
If
we multiply
is
(123)
by ^(~g)g
lk
we
an
an
ordinary divergence.
lk
integral over the surface of 2 and, as the variations 8g and their first
derivatives are zero on this surface, the first integral in (120) is zero.
Further,
we
integral in (120)
becomes
XI,
12.5
Thus we get
80'V(-flO **
Similarly,
335
we obtain by means
dx
J 2AV(-</)
125 )
<
12
of (124)
- -
**
J \g lk S/'V(-ff)
Hence, adding (125) and (126), we see that the variation of the invariant
(127)
flf)cfa
is
8J
equal to
where
37, A is
tions (12).
=-=
$y
[ Jl/^
lk
<J(g)
dx,
(128)
The
field
M =
(129)
lk
5.7
where
and
8f/'
(130)
boundary of X.
Tt is clear that (125) and (128) remain true if from J and J we
subtract any integral whose integrand has the form of an ordinary
divergence, for this can be transformed into a surface integral which
will give
no contribution to 8^ and
the contribution to
terms
in (110)
R<J(y)
S.7 for
lk
lK
can be written
j(-g)g<(v;k rirl
- r^rL).
with
(132)
336
IN
XI,
Since the contribution to R^J(-g) from the last two terms in (119)
fi,
we
is
and
fi
dx
dx
J J(~g)(R lk -\Rg lk
j *J(-g)Mlk
where
The
125
dx and
integrals J
8g*
dx
(133)
dx,
(134)
Z+2Xj(-g).
(135)
(132), (135) in
every system of
As
8g]
lk
dx
,$g
we obviously have
ff
*--,(-
[8gT<
daf\d
and similarly
1
"*
In the same
way we
get
by comparison of
XI,
125
k all
g\
337
lk
In the same
way we
homogeneous of degree
126.
see that
2.
Hence we
also
k
g\
is
have
The laws
In
115
it
is
0. This is
consequence of the covariant divergence relation div{$ }
connected with the circumstance that the vanishing of a covariant divergence of a four-vector is equivalent to the vanishing of an ordinary
is
constant
in time.
The law of conservation of energy and momentum, which has the form
(X.41)or
(143)
4,
of relativity
3595.60
338
IN
in a covariant
._.
XI,
way in
126
the
dx"
where
is
of course not transform like tensors, but the equations (143), (144),
(145) will, as we shall see, by integrations over the space coordinates,
give rise to conservation theorems for quantities which have simple
by
virtue of the rules for lowering indices together with the relations
(IX.
7).
As
the
is
sum
(12) in (144')
of the
Thus we
first
two terms
see that k
is
(
tfg
and use
(140),
which gives
only and
is
equal to
(146)
X*
where
Odtt.
(148)
= j(- g )(T*+t*).
momentum
126
XI,
The
quantities
k
t
/\l(
do not
g)
339
m the
y[
Since
is quadratic in
quantities t* can, if we neglect the Aterms, even be made equal to zero at any given point by introducing a
k
system of coordinates which is geodesic at this point. Z l /^(g) will
,
behave
constant.
a tensor only
like
However, by
if
tube with a
finite space-like
coordinates x l x 2 x*
,
we
get at once
f 3; * dx*dx*dx*
0.
(149)
dx* J
Hence we
P =
X* dx*dx*dx*
W+'i dV
(150)
Further, it is easily seen that the PI are invariant for any transformation of coordinates x'
x' (x k inside the tube which leaves the
1
by x"* = a =
coordinates
On
we
get at once
oclx
(152)
with a determinant
Xk
T
340
IN
126
XI,
components
= Xfa
bk
will,
on account of
(153)
(154)
by the linear orthogonal transformations (152). Thus, formally, the situation here is the same as in
63, apart from the use of the imaginary time representation in Chapter
VI. By the same reasoning as that used for the derivation of (VI. 31),
now
with the fact expressed by (151) we see that the P must behave like a
four-vector by any transformation which outside the tube has the form
l
of a Lorentz transformation.
(Pt
Ejc) represent the total momentum P and
quantities
of
an
isolated
0, the expression for the total
system. If t*
energy
114 for a stationary
to
obtained
in
reduces
the expression
energy
The
E
E
system. The last term in the integrals (150) may be interpreted as the
contribution of the gravitational field to the total momentum and
112, a unique separation into a
energy. As already mentioned in
material and a gravitational part is not, however, possible. The separation depends,
general, on the coordinates used in the evaluation of
momentum.
now tempting to consider
servation laws.
The
quantities
(156)
126
XI,
341
density, respectively. It should be remarked, however, that this interpretation is not independent of the coordinates used; for tj and t* and
therefore
S and
l
of space vectors
meaning which
127.
is
physically satisfactory.
and
momentum
By means of (146) and (132) we can now write down explicit expressions for the quantities t t k As shown in Appendix 9, the derivative of
with respect to gl is given by
.
_
flU*-M.
As shown by
r*
1
Jm
we then
get,
)u-
(is?)
S
**
*.$
(15*)
(158)
remembering that
aV(-)
~~ _~ ~ W
-- -- pi. --- -,
Z k may
t
also be expressed in
From
in
(148), (13),
and
(146)
we
get
342
As shown
Hence,
in
Appendix
Xf may be
9,
is,
IN
XI,
127
of the quantity
8* m
~(7
(162)
K vym
we
Further,
small
A- terms,
-_.=
J(vv
")T'_ K~= dx m
'
ff
(163)
'
Vx*
total energy
is
coordinates.
The
128.
mass and
gravitational
total
energy and
momentum
an isolated system
of
By an
isolated system
allows the
where
m is a constant.
system we then
1
=-
4
f I, dx^dx*dx*
l
cj
! f
of the
dx*d
c] dxv
(165)
The
first
integral
integral over
an
x *+y*+z 2 )*
constant.
It thus depends only on the values of the metric tensor and its derivatives
at large distances which are time-independent. As the vector PI is
constant for an isolated system, the last integral must also be constant;
128
XI,
343
actually
Hence, we get
P^ =
/.
8^
da,
(166)
where n^ = dr/dx*1 = (xjr, y/r, z/r) is a unit vectofr in the direction of tha
outward normal, and the integral is extended over the surfac^ of the
constant.
At
large distant^
V"
we
have,
ffii
all
022
=~
= .2m
+
!
033
>
/.
2ra\
S^i.SW.-IU.-UfS.
,,67,
From
F^.
(162)
^(~y) \}y
and (157)
(168)
As
G lk
and
(EX. 50)
T>
1
^4
__
(167):
x4^^
t
"2
__
ps
l
rs
/*'
_M _s
I
\~ m"
r4/
^s ~" G^ri*
^ r "~ o
(2r8 ri*
r'
(169)
Hence we get
*/*
-~8f
*^7>j
w
- --
ACT*"
and from
(166)
/>
As
PI
= -8
(P,
(170)
^ + m^ =
+
*r 2 Lw
cjf ^[('j'
\r/
E/c),
w^u
we
-8f !=?.
\r/J
momentum
KC
is
(171)
zero in the
(88),
E = -cP4 =
= Mc\
(172)
344
IN
XI,
128
P
E will have the same values as the momentum
E = -cP4 = -
X 4 4 dx
dx*dx*
In the
sphere of radius
(169),
and
constant, hence
r'
we get by means of
(162), (157),
(170)
*;/*
i
==
rs
i>rs -o^r^o^o
ir
r +8r^)-j(G
"
ir/
ro/
-{rft~i(8^rf
ID
Lf
*
-^n
**
11
=aj*,
in (173)
T\)dV,
is
(174)
different
Tl)
may
Since
according to
(92'),
T\
T\
T\
= $,
T\
-/I
c2
we have,
XI,
128
Further, for A
and
0,
we have on account
345
(175),
rsn
field -producing
gravitational
mass of the
spherical fluid
decreases with
according to (176).
is
IJL
XII
The reason for this is obvious and is conNewtonian gravitational theory represents
all
phenomena
gravitational
inside the
solar system.
The most elementary of the effects which represent a crucial test of the
general theory of relativity is the gravitational shift of spectral lines,
which is a direct consequence of the principle of equivalence. According
to (VIII. 100), the rate of a standard clock at rest in a gravitational field
at a place with the scalar gravitational potential x is connected with the
rate of the coordinate clock defining the time
dr
Now
consider an
atom
^dt(l+2 x /c^
v.
(I)
frequency
ber of light waves emitted per unit time in the time-scale of a local rest
system of inertia which is the same as the scale of the standard clock at
rest at the point
(1),
1
$(l+2 Xl /c),
(2)
AT
(l
+ 2^
2
1
/c
is
constant
in
emitted from
f This formula, which is a consequence of the principle of equivalence, has also played
discussions between Einstein and Bohr on the consistency of the
Bohr in Albert Einstein Phtloquantum mechanical description See the article by
ftopher-fictenttst, Library of Living Philosophers, voi vn, Kvanston, 1949.
an impoitaiit part
XII,
129
347
per unit time in the same scale. The frequency v of the radiation measured
by a standard clock at rest at p 2 will then be
v
where ^ 2
+ 2 X2 /c2)-^,
v 1 (l
(3)
From
(2)
is
and
(3)
we thus
get
(*>
Hence the observed frequency v will differ from the proper frequency v
by an amount Ay = v-~v, which in the case of weak fields is given by
kM
me 2
M=
where
is
1-983
10 33 gm.
Hence we get
(5')
emitted by an atom in the outer layers of the sun as compared with the
same line emitted on the earth
^ =_*(!_.!),
rj
c2
where
i\
and
r 2 are
(6)
\r t
astronomical methods which are based on the assumption that the space
is Euclidean and that the light rays are moving in straight lines. The
differences are small, however,
and
is itself
small, the
we get, putting
ofthesun
>
the value
rl
^=
^r
v
6-96x10"
2 12
'
cm.,
10~ 6
(6')
(7)
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
348
129
XII,
exterior solution (XI. 83, 88, 24). In this case, the components of the
metric tensor are
ffn
g lk
22
>
,-
A f
for
2
**
0r 33
r 2 sin 2 0,
gu
= -/ 1
^J
^
,
k,
2kM
K Mc*
47T
(8)
Hence
Yi
>
Yuc
According to (X.
-"2
17, 17'),
is
(io)
where
is
m=*
is
r2
(11)
15)
_
dt
t.
dt
2 dx l
'
35 r 898 (1911).
John, Astrophy*. Journ. 67, 195 (1928); W. Adams, Proc. Nat. Acad. 11, 382
(1925); see also E. F. Fjeundlich and W. Ledermann, Mon. Not. Rvy. Astr. Soc. 104,
1, 40 (1944).
t A. Einstein,. Ann. d. Phys.
I St.
130
XII,
349
(146)
Guv
and
~(rr*sinWd>)
(He)
0.
at
is
first
where
is
a constant of
01
by
?fe
c2
^_^
further integral
where
(17)
On
(7.
(18)
loc/r
Now
a/r
is
even for Mercury, the planet nearest to the sun, the quantity
a very small quantity of the order of magnitude
OL
and
also
iJjJL
u z /c 2
<^
c 2r
much
may
/-v
5X10- 8
/ t
smaller.
f\\
(19)
Therefore, in
be treated as a weak
field
all
actual
and, since
we may
in (15).
(X. 25) for
(15) to this approximation
constant,
(20)
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
350
To the same
which
is
r 2 <f>
C,
(21)
where
orbit deter-
/22)
is
are the
The
_?
130
XII,
r- values
For stronger
fields
0-2056,
5-786
10 12 cm.
(24)
and instead of
equation (15),
the left-hand side of (18) cannot in general be interpreted as angular
momentum, since the notion of a 'radius vector' occurring in the definition of the angular momentum has an unambiguous meaning only in a
Euclidean space.
In order to determine the orbit
l/r instead
quantity p
of
r.
Thus we
drdCI
dr
a\
-
and by means of
particle
*
- G(
(
and
r/r/
0) for
-acp)
we introduce the
= - ldp\n/-i(l
(25)
we
-"p)
/or\
(28)
'
\2
+p
-/>
(26)
(15)
we
get
(27)
2
Thus, substituting the expression (26) for u and solving with respect to
(dp/dffi, we get the differential equation for the orbit of the particle in
the form
where
equation
7/7x2
and
is
= Al
are constants.
On
Bp-p'+ap*.
(28)
2
very small compared with the term p and,
if
we
neglect
it
XII,
130
equations
(20), (21),
351
e.
'
(2
>
A + Bp-p* =
Q.
(30)
Let p l and p 2 be the two roots which must be real and positive in the case
of an orbit which stays inside a finite region in space. Then we have,
according to
The equation
(23),
may now
(29)
be written
(32)
p 1 )(p t -p)},
</> 2
cf)
in
<f>
is
obtained by integration
P2
-
,-*-J
sin-
(33)
Pl)
2(P2
-P)}
Pl
in
(22).
side of (28)
is
and since
Pi+P2+Pa
34 )
must be very large for small values of a. The roots p 1 and p 2 will therefore again represent the minimum and maximum values of p in the orbit
p3
-^
VHP
PI)(P
we now have
P 2 )(P
Pa)}
a (Pl+P2)JI
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
352
cx(/o 1
+p 2
XII,
130
we thus
+ *p\
2
and the
increase in
<f>
for
an increase of p from p i to
/> 2
is
PI
'
X
Hence the
difference in
<f>
is
(36)
which
differs
2-77
A<=~(p
+? 2
(37)
).
may
Mercury we
certainty.
a&that given by
(37).
t J. Chazy,
CM.
XII,
131
131.
The
The
353
which furnishes a
e.
dX"d\
>~~
lK
~'
a-
In the
field
described
by
and
(8)
(9)
(38)
1-
we thus have
(40)
~
d\
From
(42)
(r*6)
we
V
"
(38) with
2r 2 sin
cos
reduce to
2
-- 0,
sin 2
-f- (r
d\
0)^=0.
(42)
are integrals
-~ 2, 3
and
(41)
r*</>
(43)
then reduces to
a\
2/1
2
1/r as
dX
r2
C*a
r/
Introducing p
=,
\TT,
I4A\
44
=--.
2
c
d<f>
d\
2
A K\
cC
Now
is
easily integrated.
We
get
p
i.e.
3595.60
/>
= --sm<,
Aa
=-
-.
(46)
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
354
If
we make a
coordinates
r,
->
for
<f>
\TT
131
XII,
</>
(45)
may now
at a distance
TT.
be written
is
in a
Ap(l
(48)
ap)*
a small quantity,
/v /"
we may write
/vnl
to the
first
order
rurr\
(49)
Hence
and from
dp
dff(l
+~
(47)
According to (47) the maximum value p m of p, i.e. the value for closest
approach of the ray to the sun, corresponds to o- = 1. The corresponding
value of the angle
d>
is
is
This will be the deflexion of a light ray in the field of the sun as noted
by an observer on the earth, which in this connexion may be regarded as
infinitely far
(49)
a,
we
For a light ray which grazes the limb of the sun we then get, by means
of (5') and (6'), an angle of deflexion of 1*1 5". This effect predicted by
131
XII,
355
limb of the sun. The agreement between Einstein's formula (52) and
the observations seems to be satisfactory, J but, as the effect is just
inside the limits of experimental error, one cannot attach too much
The
deflexion (52)
pressed
by
(40)
is
geometry. If
(44)
spatial
(54)
c (l
Instead of (45)
light ex-
ct/r)
df)
first
i/j
a/A
(55)
replaced by
respectively.
deflexion
(f -"-">(*-
1oL/r
ifj
to the
The
^A\
/A
a //\
effects (55)
(56)
and
(56)
we thus come
it
all
first
approxima-
BerL Ber.,
W. W. Campbell and
may
p. 831 (1915);
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
356
131
XII,
phenomena
universe, the
different
theory
may
be
Cosmological models
has been
known
for a long
difficulties
whole.
new
shortly after the development of the general theory and has since then
been the object of many investigations by numerous authors.
shall
We
is
spatially
homogeneous and
isotropic.
It
is
true
||
W. de
Sitter,
142(1917).
Amst. Proc. 19, 1217 (1917); 20, 229 (1917).
XII,
132
357
furthermore assumed to be a
static
rf*
where a and
-- a(r)
(J/-
+r
(rf0M-
d<f>*)-b(r)c* dt*
(57)
The functions a(r) and b(r) are now connected with the proper mass
density /I and the proper pressure j8 in the universe by the field equations
(XI. 96, 94) for a perfect fluid,
'+
0,
(58)
--abr
r*
ar
Here, p and /t are constants on account of the assumed homogeneity of
the model and we shall look for the possible regular solutions of those
equations.
Since dp/dt
0, (58)
reduces to
2
(/ic
b'
or
0,
(60)
(61)
/ir
-/})//
(62)
fj
tlie
solutions of Einstein
and de
Sitter,
respectively .f
133.
The
solution characterized
constant value of
constant
may
fe,
be made equal to
to a
/
this
6-1.
(63)
Introducing (61) into (59 a) arid solving this equation with respect to a,
,
,
we obtain
~
a
(64)
2
'
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
358
E by
XII,
133
the equation
(65)
-p
which together with
we
get
l*(/i
e+$),
(66)
i*(Ac +3$).
(67)
Now
matter be far below the value /lc 2 Hence the constants A and l/E 2
must also be positive and B will therefore be a real quantity of the dimension of a length.
.
and
(67)
^i-T*'On
radiation,
we
if
the universe
is
(68)
assumed
2^ = ^ C
^,,0/2 '
f7{\\
(70)
According to the estimate of Hubble,f the lower limit for the mean
density of matter in the actual universe is of the order
fr
From
(68)
and (XI.
24)
:=
tt 10- 30 gm./cm. 3
we then
_L~
3
f
get
9xlO~ 58 cm.~ 2
(71)
we obtain
1C 28 cm.
X 10 10
light years
XII,
133
According to
universe
and
(57), (63),
is
359
^<!>
this line
of A and
R given by
(71)
tt IO 14
:__
/]0 14 \ 2
[
io- 28
(73) is
amply
system. This gives the justification for neglecting the A-term in the
treatment of all gravitational phenomena connected with the motion
of the planets Furthermore, we see that the line element of the special
theory of relativity, which is experimentally known to hold in every
72/
r2
#2'
r2
^33
'
r 2 sin 2 <9
7 IK
= n*for ^
*
y,
The
0,
bur
r 4 sin 2
},
'
(74)
Y^
0.
(75)
clement
spatial line
is
*>
<
&
(76)
TT
27T
IT
27T
r 2 sinedrd6d<t>
000
000
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
360
obviously
if
is
origin
~-
=.
mass
dV
fi
dV
2~ E
and
(68) or (70)
we
(78)
we
get
in the universe
--- 7r 2
of (79)
-_
is
/3,
/?sin
By means
133
XII,
/P/l
origin
is
(79)
of the order
'
get
~~xl.
l,
(80)
477X1
These relations are in accordance with the relations (XI. 49, 50) suggested
by the considerations in 120 on the nature of the centrifugal and Conohs
forces
The
kind.
If
?/
(81)
r sin 6 sin
?/ 3
where
?/o+2/i +#!+#!
</>
=^
(82)
dyl
dyl+dyl+dyl
(83)
This shows that the physical space of the Einstein universe may also be
interpreted as the three-dimensional surface of the sphere (82) of radius
~ R cos
J/T,
6,
<f>
on the sphere
yl
iff,
Cartesian coordinates
R sin
ifj
(82)
by
cos 9
(84)
\\e
get
Rsiinfj
(85)
133
XII,
(0, 9,
</>)
<
By
in the intervals
l/f
^ <
77,
0<0<27T.
77,
(86)
= #
da 2
and since
(d^ +sin
d0 2 +sinV sin 2
(87)
d<j>*),
in these coordinates
we
361
\y LK
_R 6 sin 4 </fsin 2 0,
7T
TT
7T
= 477#
J ^ ^snvtysinfl
$
j
000
dif>
d0
J sinV
This
is
is
^ ^ 2^
3
-
(88)
also clear
from
(85)
and
corresponding to
the sphere are counted as one point only in elliptical space.
Similarly we find from (87) that the total distance around the closed
</r
is
L = 2R
difj
(89)
277.R,
which thus represents the distance one would have to travel along a
'major circle' on the sphere (82) in order to return to the starting-point.
The relations (80) remain true also m the spherical Einstein universe.
Since the dynamical potentials (y %) are zero, the gravitational force
on a particle is zero and since, further, the system of reference is rigid,
t
a free particle in
the universe is
straiyhtest line compatible with the spatial geometry of the universe (see
end of
110)
remain at
is
thus valid
rest.
According to (X. 94) and (75) the velocity of light is constant and
equal to c. Light emitted by a star at rest at the point (r, 6, </>), at the
time ^ will therefore arrive at the origin r =
at the time
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
362
and
since r x
is
constant,
we
by
get
A/ 2
133
XII,
differentiation
---
A^.
(91)
by standard
and
clocks at rest
(91) therefore
effects
is
equal to the
we should
actual universe.
134.
The de
Sitter universe
to the Einstein
0c2+
If
(59 a)
f
(ab)
or
--=
ab
By
in this case
constant.
course always be
ofa:
Introducing y
ab
I/a as a
(yr)'
new
1.
(93)
now be
= y'r+y
written
- +l-(
C
u
:r 3 +constant.
,
(94)
134
XII,
Since y
(94)
is
must be
regular for r
(95)
in
zero.
-^
./I
(57)
363
(93)
and
-~
(94)
(96)
we then
- MB*
<
97 >
Thus a
0,
=~
a-
upon by a gravitational
K = -mgradx =
h55'
98 )
force
>l
(")
proportional to the variable r, which means that the law of inertia does
not hold over large regions of space in the de Sitter world. Only in regions
for
which
(X.
by
15)
(99).
It
113 of eliminating the dynamical potentials by the introduction of a suitable set of space-time coordinates. This is attained by
discussed in
defining
new
variables
r', 0',
<f>',
t'
by the transformation
(.00,
e,
$=
<f>
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
364
XII,
134
this trans-
which is easily
coordinates x
e'W(d/ 2 + r' 2
verified
',
y'', z'
by
2
2
df )-c dt' 2
connected with r\
9',
<f>'
(101)
new space -
all
722
-^ -
733
- ~& _
(102)
values from
__
dt'
~oo
to
-f<x>-
^33
(103)
Vt
and the
spatial Christoffel
Thus, the time variable
rest at
any reference
'
symbols are
is
t'
At any
point.
all zero.
the time
fixed time
if
at
is
Euclidean, x', y' z' being Cartesian coordinates apart from the common
to a point (/,#',(/>'),
factor (WIK. The distance from the origin r'
as measured by standard measuring-rods, is
',
l^
The
velocity of light
is
p/r/V.
(104 )
c.
MO^
__ c
(10o)
d7'Further,
it is
easily seen that the trajectories of light rays are straight lines.
first
i -=.
1, 2,
3 in these equations,
we
get
and by integration
x
--
aA
--=
a'e -**'"',
(106)
dv'/dt'
dy'ldt'
dz'/dt'
(107)
f G.
J
134
XII,
^o __
~~
yp __ z
~ zo
,
(IDS)
a3
a2
a1
365
Since the light rays are rectilinear in the (x y z')-space we can obviously
apply the usual tnangulation method to determine the parallax of
f
and
celestial bodies
in this
way determine
by
direct
measurements.
Let us now consider the propagation of a light ray along the
From
(105)
and
(103)
we
^-fcce-cr/*.
time
/Q
-axis.
get
or
The motion of a
a:'
(110)
is
x'Q
>
at the
thus given by
(111)
and we
XQ
<
Re'***'
x'
1
*,
0.
Although the world corresponding to the line element (102) is apparently infinite, an observer at the Origin will never be able to obtain any
information about the regions outside the 'horizon' defined by (112).
The greatest distance inside the observable world of an observer placed
at the origin at the time
Q is
t'
thus,
by
(104)
J.IL,
V>cto/RJ?e-cta/R
and
T>
Jt,
(112),
1 O\
(1li0
e. it is
all
against any displacement of the origin, this consideration holds for any
observer at rest in the system of reference considered here. However,
the position of the horizon will of course be different for the different
'equivalent' observers.
is
zero
^=0,
(114)
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
366
XII,
134
where
= mu
p.
W>
:==z
",
(115)
dx'
Further, since the spatial Christoffel symbols are zero in the present
case,
we have
^ = constant
(116)
y *P K
(117)
now
get
dx
dx'fdt'
61
6 2 6 3 are constants.
,
by
"'
"
62
dz'jdt'
~~P~
Thus the
i/
/!/
y ~~y*
ft
we
(i!7)
_
_
~ dy'ldt' ~
~&i~~~
where
From
__
f*
z
~Z
*r
nAA7
i9\
9
'
but the velocity of the particle is in general not constant. Only if the
velocity at one time is zero relative to the system of reference considered here will
it
by a
of
113.
134
XII,
367
jj
dL
which
^dt'
(s
M'ltf
R^ ^R
r
/_ df*\
1'
(120)
and
(105)
is
-'/*.
(121)
and t'2 are the times for the emission of radiation from the
and its reception at the origin r'
0, respectively, we get by
if t[
Thus,
particle
integration
o
**
dr'
On
differentiation
of two successive
-c
A^ - A
since
t'
is
R(e-^ R -e-^ R ).
(122)
Now,
or
e-*'/* dt'
relation:
e^-W'*.
(123)
./
A4.
(123)
X*e&-*V*.
(124)
is,
From
Thus,
(124)
if
we
f '0VR
R(4*t't-4yR-\Y
(125)
therefore get
we assume
AA
A-A
(126)
ties are at rest in the system of coordinates used here, we get an explanation
,
EXPERIMENTAL VERIFICATION OF
368
XII,
1IU
R~
R in
l-66xl0 27 cm.
(126)
1-75
(7
10 light years.
is
(127)
tion rests essentially on the assumption that the nebulae in the mean are
at rest relative to the system of reference defined by the coordinates
1
(x
',
y',z',
t').
This assumption,
very natural and has the attractive feature that all nebulae in this model
same footing so that an observer at any other reference point
are on the
obtained from
where
r' is
according to the
at the point r
for t~>
we
=R
+00.
Finally
introducing
equations
,
variables
five
z^
(z Q ,z v z 2 z 3 ,z 4 )
,
the
by
=
(129)
we have
z*
=^
(130)
^-o
and the
line
* = t (*>)
/i-O
8
8
-
131
R in
a five-dimen-
(1930).
134
XII,
369
Since the equations (130) and (131) are form -invariant under the group
of five-dimensional orthogonal transformations of the variables (z^),
the line element (102) will be form-invariant under the group L of the
l
(x',y',z',ct ) concorresponding transformations of the variables x
nected with (z ,...,z 4 ) by the equations (129). The transformations of
in the sense of
the
flat
121.
Even
large
equation
0, (1*32)
if
o 2
+^ ^
132 )
we permit
very
much
mean
in
fields
can be explained along these lines in the Einstein model of the universe,
the empty de Sitter model does not of course afford any basis for such
explanation,, the non-permanent fields being here of the same nature as
the fictitious forces in Newton's theory.
These considerations make it probable that the Einstein model repre-
(1941)
3595 60
Chap XII,
p. 364,
and
C. Moller,
18,
No.
6, p.
40
370
XII,
134
model despite its failure to explain the systematic red shift of the light
coming from the nebulae. If we want to construct a model in which the
advantages of the two static models of Einstein and de Sitter are combined we must obviously have recourse to non-static models in which
the metric tensor is intrinsically time-dependent. Such models have
been extensively studied in the literature. f These investigations include
models which expand from an originally static state as well as models
which undergo successive expansions and contractions. Our present
knowledge of the actual universe, which only covers a limited region in
space and time, is, however, totally insufficient and thus no unique
choice between the different non-static models is possible.
f See the extensive treatment of these problems in Tolman'b book, Relatwity, Thermodynamics, and Cosmology, Oxford, 1934
APPENDIXES
1. Gauss's theorem
LET V be a finite domain bounded by a
\->
2*2*
&XL
Assuming that the surface o- is convex so that a straight line parallel to the a^-axis
two points only, this
with constant values of x 2 and x 3 intersects the surface a
integral may, by partial integration with respect to the variable x l9 be written
(1)
a,
nida~-^dc 2 dx 3
nj da+
Hcnoe
(1)
may
(2)
be written
/'"-/"*
(3')
If, in
field
particular, /,
(a t )
we
g,
get
2(
a 3( x
a vector
(3), (3')
V
or
J
V
diva dV
^-
da
J (a n)
o
a n da,
(4)
where a n is the component of a in the direction of the outward normal. The equation (4) which enables us to transform the volume integral on the left-hand side
into a surface integral represents G aura's theorem (IV. 188).
359560
APPENDIXES
372
if
Further,
=/
*u
^2
tK (x) is
V>
**
a three-dimensional tensor
* from ( 3 > and < 3/
field
of rank
2,
we
get, putting
n K )rfa,
F
i
(5)
e.
2.
densities 8 l
and s^
According to (V.
4, 4')
(1)
gj-O
a consequence of the equation
is
<n
The transformation must
there-
9
59 3 59}
SQ'-ffQ
4/
2'
Jt\ 5 l 5
i
(2)
twenty variables
sl
to the restriction
<9
and
.9^
c)s k /cxi
which
arc*
subjected
a
"
/^v
\*7
j,t
By
j.
^,,
or,
and
(6)
we
get
by
is
*?
m
,?
k in this equation
we
we must have
ax*
*;*<
get
of(6 '>
(6')
symmetrical in k and
dX
Taking
14),
(6)
f )8 t ,.
= A(,K*
|(J
^A;
i.e.
A(
From
and
s % also.
APPENDIXES
where the
sv
0, it
f$ lk
the form
tt
*t
From
373
3),
and
(8)
we now
/o\
^ik 8 kget
= A ^s
- A (l-ttVc
2
fc ,
or
p'
(l-w
/2
/c
(9)
).
/>
the same relativity argument as was used in connexion with the equations
8, 14) it now follows that the constant A must have the value
By
(II.
A=l,
and
(8)
density
3.
(10)
5),
is
cE
diyH
dlvE
ccurlH,
/xH
D-
0>
B^
eE,
(1)
cc-urlE,
(2)
(3)
/xH.
In the case of a plane wave with wave planes perpendicular to the .r-axis of a
Cartesian system of coordinates (x,y,z) the field vectors are functions of x and t
only. From 1 and from the ^-component of the vector equation (2) we therefore
(
get
w _
f=te =E*- H'-*
*3r
'
and
no importance
in optics
we may put
Et = H,~
The
y-
dEy
(4)
give
(2)
dH
8EZ
8H,
Differentiating one of the sets of equations (5) or (6) with respect to t and using
we see that each of the functions v z v z satisfies the wave
E E H H
equation
?
w=
where
is
a constant
The general
solution of the
^0
-~
VM
wave equation
(8)
(7) is
whero/j and/2 are arbitrary functions. The two terms in this expression represent
plane waves travelling with velocity w in the directions of the positive
APPENDIXES
374
and negative
--=
EZ
-*/>),
"*/(
~-
wave
travelling in the
c-*g(t-jt/w),
(9)
lfy
-fj.-*g(t-jr/w),
.-
(6)
wo then
(10)
p-*f(t-x/w).
The equations (4), (9), and (10) represent the most general expression for a plane
\va\e moving in the direction of the positive r-axis
Introducing three unit
tors
v<1
n
e
e< 3
these equations
may
E
(1,0,0),
(1)
(0,1,0),
>
(0,0,1),
be written
*-*/(/
.-.
-(x
(x n)/V)e (>)
n)ftt')ew-] c-*g(i
-n-lg(t- (x n)/M')e
(1
M-/A-V('-( x
n)e<
2
>,
and
in this veetoi
aibitiar \ but constant unit vectors peipeiidicular to eaeli other ancl to the
t
wave
normal n
Transformation
4.
by
x'^x'^t*),
=-
j'*
/(i'),
t/c
(1)
'
system of reference,
1-
-^
TTT
4
C^t'
\\e get
system of reference
/l
th
Thus
59)
0.
M4
(2)
y[i
f
loin u Inch
*[&iyim
a[4<//4
4(if/Ai
J^ii).
(2')
we obtain
Further,
i-e.
Thus y LK transforms
(4)
ojajfy^
yi'ic
like
r/<7
--
y LK
djc'dx* is invariant
under
---
ji
l
,
x'*
-/(.r
1
)
(5)
APPENDIXES
is
375
a special transformation (1) in which only the rate and setting of the coordinate
In this case we have
<--g-S-i.
Using
this
m (VIII.
55) with
-=.-
we
4,
aj+cx 4 ai
If wo
we
get
c*X
0,
1.
get fiom
(3)
(7)
the conditions
Mi
%}>*-
winch by means of
(7)
r^M
2 x/ c3 )
-J
2 x /(l2 )
___?!
()
'
109)
c^^V(H 2 X /c-)ca
= ^ =
-^~
/ii)
~'<J\\
Putting
<r t
we
get from
(2), (2
),
(6),
and
(11)
\J(
(S)
-<!
It
is
*1
-fcr t
mv aiiant undei
the transforma-
we have
rV
winch togethci with
(12)
and
_i.
c'*'
(8)
CI K
c'r*-
il
c'i
'
gives
K ^r / +
.
is
<I
(13 )
,^..
can be ui itten
multiplied
systems.
5.
the quantities
1
*<*A
=-
fi
vy8 [KA
e.
--
\y LK
0,
...
(1)
APPENDIXES
376
yU
ylK
ylA
--
IK
are
now
components aro
contruvariaiit
H'-Je*l/ =
^8,
lrt
tlio
an antisymmetric tensor
LJX
H dual to
>fA
ff A
l
(4)
(5)
n ,Hn ,Hn
(H*,H*,H*)~^(H
which show that the iclations reciprocal to
//
From two
eW
(3)
//,
A,
and
(4)
=- c
lKA
)t
are
H\
(5')
we can
vectors
l
a*, 6
F=
If
H ~ ^TT
l
^wA #KA
ls
(6)
_L
Vy
le
KA
VLK ^
^-l3
1KA
d ^y Hi
d&
means of
(5)
Similarly to
iK
for,
L^
of rank 3
is
a pseudo -scalar
^A.
dx K
dr*
The
-i
___
axb
a Kb
a bK
(7)
IK
the divergence of
is
we have
dH *
lffA
2Vy
fix 1
1
^}Similarly
6.
by means of
(5')
and
(2)
we
(8)
get
coordinates which
obviously have
is
D
^iWm =
If this condition
is
fulfilled
we
(1)
APPENDIXES
377
at every point, where -#t jy m is the curvature tensor defined by (IX. 99). Conversely,
shall now show that ( I ) also represents a sufficient condition for flatness.
we
is
called stationary if
the equation
it satisfies
at every point where T\r (x) is the ChnstofTel symbol. The equations (2) represent
a set of differential equations for the functions a i (x) which have solutions only if
dx m dx l
are satisfied.
The conditions
(3)
may
also be written
-** =
The integrabihty conditions
is
given.
is
da*
if (1)
holds,
uniquely determined
Since
if
and
o.
0')
can
= ^dx = -TLa'dx
ox
l
1
,
of a vector is unique and independent of the path along which the displacement is
"
performed.
Let us now consider four different solutions a$
{af^, af2) afg) aJ4) } of the
differential equations (2) determined by four given vectors af (P) at the arbitrary
point P. The vectors a\k} (P) must be taken to be linearly independent for
instance orthogonal to each other. It can then be shown that we get a trans1
l
k which leads to a
formation x /l
jc' (x
system of coordinates (x' ) geodesic everywhere if we choose the transformation coefficients
,
fc)
K) =
In the first place
may be written
it is
(*)
&>(*)
i
*
are satisfied by the expressions (4). In fact, since the equations (2) hold for each
of the vector fields afk)9 we have
doil
rf
(JOLT,
dx r
& - a?
datir) .
-*=
-^
=
Thus the
in the
Christoffel symbols
system of coordinates
and therefore
(x'*).
i.e.
o.
APPENDIXES
378
The
7.
particle in
an arbitrary gravitational
field
is
e.
= dt(\ + 2 X / C
w = ylK u u*
dr
where
~~
u*/c
)*,
K
y iK x x
l
1S the sca l ar gravitais the square of the velocity of the particle, and %
x( x ^
tional potential According to (VIII, 85) the time-track of the particle is determined by the variational principle
-o
and, since the integrand is a homogeneous function of the four variables dx' /dX of
first degree, (2) is equivalent to a variational problem with only three dependent
variables x and with t as the independent variable. f
Hence the motion of the particle is determined by a vanationul principle
l
by a constant
and t
t2
ja
is
L(ji^jc^t)dt
J L(ji^jc^t
0,
(3)
given by
et
with
dL
Further,
12)
(>L
r
~dr l
(5)
--
at
13),
U K U A ~ m dx
~dx~L
<-yKA
"
~dx'
Courant and
7)
CJL
is
given
APPENDIXES
379
17) Using the general formula (VIII. 98) for dr/dt instead of (VIII. 99) in
one could in the same way find the expression for the gravitational force in a
general system of coordinates, where y ^ and, in particular, the formula (X. 18).
From the Lagrangian form (5) of the equations of motion we can now pass
over to the canonical Hamiltoman form by the usual procedure. According to
(6), the canonical ly conjugate momenta of the coordinates x are the covanant
by (X.
(4),
--
pi^-L
----
=
which
is
Thus, by means of
particle
mc
+ 2 x /c
(l
~w
(4)
and
/c )-i
(8)
),
identical with the expression (X. 22) for the energy of a particle in a
0.
In a static gravitational
gravitational field with y
of the motion. Solving (6) with respect to w we get
t
field,
is
a constant
t,
which allows us
We
It
H as a function of the
to express
got
is
'*
now
canonical
and
(10)
)*.
(7)
Hamiltoman equations
*-"
<-%
also be applied
in this case
r (t) is compared with a
In the variation principle (3), the actual motion
virtual motion
which the particle has the coordinates Jc
.**(<) -j-8.r ($) at the
time /, i e the symbol 8 refers to a variation when; the time is kept constant.
shall now consider a more general variation by which the time is varied also, so that
the particle in the* varied motion has the coordinates
#'(0 + A# at the time
l
We
where A
t-{ A/,
A.r l =- 8.ri+j/At
(12)
and, consequently,
A
v*t
__
_ __
_
~~
A^
dt
__
_____
~
__ _
"~
~dt l
dt
t.
dt
dt
d&i
d&t
d&t
_-_
+J -A,^.__^_,
1
Ar
01
Thus,
Hence,
and
^(L
dt)
L
9
jc
l
,
t)
+x
Ldt
&t.
(13)
of the variables x
&Ldt + Ldkt
Sx
fi
$L
cft
dt-\
At)
l
9
Jt
-^-dt
and
(15)
(16)
APPENDIXES
380
According to
(3)
and
we
(16),
thus have
**
A
J
Ldt^Q
(17)
A*
On
account of
(8) this
^ and
(18)
2.
also be written
may
Now we
for
p^d^-b
Hdt
0.
--=-
(19)
have
r
dt)
//A
rf/
|-
dt
A -variation
is
s u-
OJnL
oi \
("*)
/
U,
which means that the energy of the particle at any time has the same value in
the actual and the virtual motion. This does not necessarily mean that the energy
we then
get
"=0
and
(19) reduces to
p,
dr
(22)
'i
(22) together with (21) and (18) correspond to Maupertuis's principle of least
action in its most general form
is equal to a constant K> along the actual path,
For a static field, the energy
<?
and Maupertuis's
p dx
L
m first approximation
*i
has the same value for all virtual motions with the same energy E. In the static
may even be eliminated entirely from (22). Since p = mw and
dcr/dt
p dx
p u
and
(22)
we have
may
dt -
be written
mil* da/u
mu dcr
=-
p da
(&)
0,
where
(x\)
and
(jc)
&T
this
(23)
and
2t
respectively.
Putting
in (10),
p =
p-m;
to p,
we
get
(24)
(l
+ 2 x /c
)-4{(^/c)
0,
(25)
APPENDIXES
381
E as well as the end points (x\) and (x^) are to be kept constant by the
A-vanation. In this form, the variation principle is analogous to Hertz's 'principle
of the straightest path' in Newtonian mechanics. In the limit of weak fields and
small velocities the integrand in (25) reduces to
where
V{2m (e-w
which
where
x)},
E-Jk Q c 2
-=
da
0,
(26)
which shows that the path is a geodesic in the space defined by the metric tensor y
As remarked by Hertz, f the more general case, where x(x = 0, can formally
be treated also as a problem of determining a straightest path, but in a space
where the line element is defined by
t/c
dS
- TIK dx
dx K
=p
da 2
>
(27)
Such a treatment
8.
64, 63)
we have
(1)
044
in the
form
0i4
024
on account of
t
is
if
(1).
APPENDIXES
382
If
we apply
the
same procedure
to the second
and the
011
012
013
014
021
022
023
024
031
032
033
034
041
042
043
044
third
W
/
V("0)
9.
The
Vy V(l+2 x /c
(-044> Vy
column we get
we have
(3)
).
with respect to
ffi
and
lm
where
Hence, since
</j!
</'*
lh
\\Y
i*
can be written
B =
s
is <
m we have
~-
*-'"--
g rfm Y L
lr
in partial derivation
^^^
(2)
Mith respect to
61,4
From (IX
68')
we
got
(6)
Hence
winch
(8)
is
symrnctrji al in
Thus, by means
and
?//
(cf. tlie
140)).
8A
B we consider a variation
The corirspondmg variation of B is
^dLSiirsr
87*
If, in
k,
I, r,
m we get
Hence
of the
&B
___
gT\k
),
68) reduces to
SB
(10)
APPENDIXES
which together with
(9)
and
(3)
383
*~)O
^-
V(-flO{r{m-i(8? r^+s^rf^-K^Tfc-flf^r;.)^}.
In the same way we can find the derivative of i* with respect to y l>H
easier to use the equation (XI 139) according to which
(ii)
However,
it is
The last term may be obtained from (11) by differentiation with respect to x k
while the first term is given by (IX. 114, 111) Besides the components of the metric
tensor and Christoffel symbols these expressions contain derivatives of the
Christoffel symbols. Since fl and therefore also the left-hand side of (12) does not
contain derivatives of Christoffel symbols, all terms on the right-hand .side containing such derivatives must cancel arid we may therefore omit them from the
beginning in our calculation. By differentiation of (11) with respect to .*,* we are
then left with terms containing derivatives of ^J( g}, g, gi m only By means of
(IX 69', 68, 51) these terms and therefore also the right-hand side of (12) may
be expressed in terms of components of the metric tensorand of Christoffel symbols
After a straightforward calculation one finds
,
0,1,
-j^r^Mi^H- i\ mk )}- ^ m
(is)
The expressions (11) and (13) for the derivatives of with respect to g and g lm
are easily seen to be in accordance with the equations (XI 141, 142).
It we now substitute (11) and (13)
the last term $]{ on the right-hand side of
l
~~
d
1
.
82
AUTHOR INDEX
Abraham, M.,
204, 205.
Adams,
348.
-B 26
Anderson, C D
Airy,
Neddermeyer, S
Hertz,
381.
Neumann, C 356
Neumann, G 89.
Hoek, M
Hubble, E
91.
Bambridge, K T 90
Beauregard, O C. de,
D,
Hilbert,
170.
Huyghens,
Ilhngworth,
K K
Ives,
10,
H E
Born,
75, 157, 194, 195.
Bradley, J., 25.
de Broghe, L 58, 105
89
Bucherer, A.
,
Courant,
Curie,
Johot, F 91.
Jordan, E. B 90.
,
Dirac, P.
A M
195,
204,
91, 98.
10, 19,
20
89.
Kaufmann,
Kennedy, R J 28
Kmoshita, S 10
Galileo,
220.
89.
89.
170
Langevin,
Laue, M. v
Lemaitre,
369
Lense,
89
348.
G E
327, 364,
Lewis, G
Livingston,
309, 333.
90
6.
Meitner, L 91
Michelson, A. A., 15, 19,24,
,
26, 28.
Miller,
D. C
28.
Morley, E. W.,
326,
v 356
327
,
10
Smith, N
Sommerfeld,
190,
19,
26
258,
jr
90
75,
129,
144
Stark,
G R
G G
Tamm, J
Thirrmg,
220
10
10,
62
15
327
Thomas, L W., 56
Tolman, C., 67, 204, 214.
341, 357, 370.
355.
Trumpler,
Walton, G T. S 89.
5.
Weber,
Weyl,H., 157, 309, 333, 368.
Weyssenhoff, J. v., 250.
Synge, J
Mmkowski,
Sitter,
Stokes,
28,
Maxwell, J C
Stilwell,
67
S
Lodge, O., 28
Lorentz, H.
Siege!,
Southerns,
317
Levi-Civita,
Seehger,
Serim,
Lavanchy, C
Ledermann,
330.
85, 258
Sagnac, G 64
Scheye, A 209.
Schwarzschild,
Gerlach,
Guye, Ch.
Fresnel, A.-J., 16
Freundhch, E., 348.
Fried lander, B., 320
Fnedl&nder, T., 320.
P 364, 369
Robertson,
Rosonfeld, L., 21, 186.
224.
F 338
Kohlrausch, R
Fizeau,
170
Kant,
91.
Dallenbach,
206
S., 91.
Rasetti, F., 91
Reissner, H., 333
378.
P.
H
M H
Pryce,
348
Klein,
89.
Papapetrou,
Pomcare,
85, 88
Cockcroft, J.
Ocehiahni,
Champion, F. C
Chazy, J 352.
219.
4,
91.
Phihpp,
Planck, M., 181, 211.
28
62
91.
John, S
Newton, I,
G., 286.
Blackett, P
Bohr, N., 346.
91
Bergmann, P.
Humason,
10.
17.
Hermann,
Yukawa,
Zeeman,
184.
SUBJECT INDEX
Aberration of light, 25, 62.
Action principle for a particle in a gravita-
Electrodynamics in a gravitational
Addition of velocities,
field,
3, 52.
Electromagnetic
field
141,
tensor,
196,
302.
of, 20.
Energy, conservation
of, 163,
337.
gravitational, 340.
kinetic, 70.
of a particle in
tional field, 294.
transformations
170,
238, 296
258, 290,
theoiy, 105.
field,
295,
a gravitational
the
special
stress,
momentum
of,
Mmkowski's, 202
for perfect fluids, 182, 300.
total, 161, 163.
Equivalence
of energy
and mass,
78;
Fizeau's experiment, 19
Flat space, condition for, 376.
Force, electromagnetic, 155, 156, 203, 205,
306.
fictitious, 4, 218,
219
gravitational, 291
transformation
of, 70,
73
Four-acceleration, 102
current density, 140, 141, 197, 302
force, 105,
295
momentum,
104, 289
wave number
Geodesic
energy density
in
Abraham's,
elastic, 176.
of,
momentum and
tensor,
204
pheudo-Cartosian, 233
quasi -Gali lean, 342
time -orthogonal systems
Conohs force, 4, 218, 317
of, 28.
Energy-momentum
of
a stationary. gravita-
density,
175-81.
and
Gravitational
field,
static,
250,
323;
SUBJECT INDEX
386
approximation
a paitiele
external gravitational field, 379
Hook's experiment, 1 7
Huygheris principle, 11.
Hyperbolic motion, 75
for
in
un
Poynting's vector,
Pseudo-tensor, 112, 270
Hay
Ideal
I.
Kronocker symbol, 94
04
solution,
325,
118; without
symmetry, 323
-
234
inertial, 1, 17
field,
experimental determination
of, 231,
237.
rigid,
253
mulation
238
of,
Thomas
inertia, 69.
in
uniformly
1 1 1, 138, 190
of a material particle in a
gravitational field, 290, in a system of
of force,
Momentum
for-
214
in stationary matter, 21
Michelson's experiment, 26
and
light rays,
244
of,
188
and
Schwarzschild's oxtonor
transformation
15,
Moment
11,
spatial,
in a giavitational
247.
58
Reference points, 234
systems, ^eo systems- of reference.
forces
Relativity of centrifugal
Conolis forces, 317.
general pimciple of, 218
--
gravitational
dynamical, 296-8
Li&nard-Wiechert's, 149
retarded, 148, 315
Hamiltoman equations
of
elimination
Potentials,
313
of,
paiticles
and
348
7'arwo, 10
Velocity of propagation of the energy, 164
ma lightwave,
Work, 70
161,
206